(Unlinked) 2007 Odyssey - American Honda Motor …...2007 Odyssey Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) This document does not contain hype rlinks and may be formatted for prin ting instead

2007 OdysseyOwner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is due to changes in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.© 2006 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 31SHJ6210

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Odyssey. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SHJC20

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０６／０７／２６　１７：２０：５３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０００１　

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Hondadealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique toyour Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Honda Odyssey was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

０６／０７／２６　１７：２０：５８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０００２　

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devicesrecord front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbagsystem component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legallyrequired or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Introduction

WARNING:

ii

０６／０７／２６　１７：２１：０２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０００３　

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

the vehicle owner.

The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle contain perchlorate materials – special handling

also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked to

may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlor. ate.

－－

－

－

－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２１：１３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０００４　

０６／０７／２６　１７：２１：１５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０００５　

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(main controls)

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column)

(climate control, audio, steering wheel, rear entertainment, security, cruise control, and HomeLink)

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minders, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

Contents

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

..........................................Instruments and Controls . 63

....Features . 213

.......................................................................Before Driving . 305

.........................................................................................Driving . 319

...............................................Maintenance . 345

.........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 391

......................................Technical Information . 421

..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 437

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 441

IND

EX

1

０６／０７／２６　１７：２１：２４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０００６　

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new Honda, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

How to operate the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem, the audio system, rearentertainment and other

convenience features.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

The maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park; pluswhat you need to know if you’replanning to tow a trailer.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Technical Information

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information SummaryTaking Care of the Unexpected

Maintenance

Driving

Before Driving

Overview of Contents

2

０６／０７／２６　１７：２１：３９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０００７　


Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKETS

RETRACTABLE CENTER TRAY

HEATING ANDCOOLING SYSTEM/

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

GLOVE BOXES

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG(P.9, 27)

(P.65, 66)(P.77)

(P.308)(P.192) (P.206)

(P.9, 35)

(P.204)

(P.214)

(P.195)

(P.184)

(P.322)DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORSGAUGES

MIRRORCONTROLS

POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH(P.154)

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEMBUTTONS

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE(P.307)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P.187)

(P.185)

(P.191)

０６／０７／２６　１７：２１：４７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０００８　

＊＊

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

1:2:


4

POWER TAILGATESWITCH

PARKING SENSORSYSTEM SWITCH

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) OFFSWITCH

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLBUTTONS

MOONROOFSWITCH


PEDAL POSITIONADJUSTMENT SWITCH

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERSREAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER

CLOCK

PASSENGERAIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

POWER SLIDINGDOOR SWITCH

/

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

HORN

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS

AUDIO SYSTEM/REARENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

NAVIGATIONSYSTEM BUTTONS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS(P.193)

(P.165)

(P.190)

(P.161)

(P.331)

(P.299)

(P.331)

(P.255) (P.144)

(P.82)

(P.208)(P.225, 257)

(P.138, 141)(P.137)(P.138)

(P.291)

(P.254)

(P.35)

(P.143)

(P.143)1

2

０６／０７／２６　１７：２１：５６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０００９　

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 12............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 13

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 145. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 156. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 21

..Seat Belt System Components . 21......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22

Automatic Seat Belt.............................Tensionners . 23

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 24Additional Information About Your

.....................................Airbags . 25......Airbag System Components . 25

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 27

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 31How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 33..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 35

How the Passenger Airbag...............Off Indicator Works . 35

.............................Airbag Service . 36...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 38

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 38

All Children Should Sit in a Back...........................................Seat . 39

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 39

If You Must Drive with.....................Several Children . 41

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 41

...Additional Safety Precautions . 41Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 43.......................Protecting Infants . 43

.........Protecting Small Children . 44.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 46....................Installing a Child Seat . 47

...............................With LATCH . 48.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 51

..............................With a Tether . 53...........Protecting Larger Children . 56

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 56..................Using a Booster Seat . 57

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 58

...Additional Safety Precautions . 59.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 60

...................................Safety Labels . 61

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

０６／０７／２６　１７：２２：００　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００１０　

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

15

59

347

38

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

6

０６／０７／２６　１７：２２：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００１１　

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(8)

(9)

(9)

(11)

(10)(7)

(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(11) Door Locks

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column

０６／０７／２６　１７：２２：１８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００１２　

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What you should do:

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２２：２９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００１３　

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact or rollover (seepage for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

27

31

33


AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

9

０６／０７／２６　１７：２２：３６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００１４　

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.


Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:

10

０６／０７／２６　１７：２２：４２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００１５　

－

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors and thetailgate are closed and locked.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

Your vehicle has a door andtailgate monitor indicator onthe instrument panel to

indicate when a specific door or thetailgate is not tightly closed.

The door and tailgate open monitorappears on the multi-informationdisplay to indicate when a specificdoor or the tailgate is not tightlyclosed.

38 42

CONTINUED

On Touring modelsIntroduction Close and Lock the Doors1.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

０６／０７／２６　１７：２２：５１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００１６　

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

When one or more doors are nottightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’message will come on.

When the tailgate is not tightlyclosed, the ‘‘TAILGATE OPEN’’message will come on.

When both tailgate and one or moredoors are not tightly closed, the‘‘DOOR & TAILGATE OPEN’’message will come on.

Locking the doors and the tailgatereduces the chance of someonebeing thrown out of the vehicleduring a crash, and it helps preventpassengers from accidentallyopening a door or the tailgate andfalling out.

Locking the doors and the tailgatealso helps prevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door or thetailgate when you come to a stop.

See page for how to lock thedoors and the tailgate, and page

for how the door and tailgatemonitor indicator works.

This vehicle has auto door locking/unlocking features. See page forhow to set them.

This vehicle has auto door locking/unlocking features. See pages

and for how to set them.

154

155

126 128

75

On LX, EX and EX-L models

On Touring models

Adjust the Front Seats2.


12

０６／０７／２６　１７：２３：００　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００１７　

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you extend the adjustable driver’sfoot pedals (Touring models only,see page ), or investigatewhether some type of adaptiveequipment may help.

See pages and for how toadjust the front seats.

After you adjust a manual seat, rockit back and forth to make sure theseat is locked in position.

171 172

193

144

CONTINUED

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２３：０８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００１８　

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.Adjust the driver’s head restraint so

the back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See pages and for how toadjust the seat-backs.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

174

173171

Adjust the Head Restraints4.


14

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２３：１７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００１９　

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

The center seating position of thethird row has a detachable seat beltthat can be unlatched and retractedinto the ceiling to allow the seat to befolded down. See page for how tounlatch and relatch the seat belt.

The plus-one seat on EX and EX-Lmodels that can be installed in thecenter seating position of the secondrow also has a detachable seat beltanchor.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

16

CONTINUED

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２３：２６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００２０　

The front seats and second row seatshave adjustable seat belt anchors. Toadjust the height of an anchor,squeeze the two release buttons, andslide the anchor up or down asneeded (it has four positions).

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

Pull out the anchor latch and thelatch plate from the holding slots inthe ceiling, and pull out the seat beltto extend it.

The plus-one seat on EX and EX-Lmodels that can be installed in thecenter seating position of the secondrow also has a detachable seat beltanchor.

21

Using the Lap/Shoulder Belt in theCenter Position of the Third Row

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.


16

RELEASEBUTTONS

LATCHPLATE

ANCHORLATCH

０６／０７／２６　１７：２３：３４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００２１　

Insert the hook at the end of theanchor latch into the anchor buckleby lining up the triangle marks onthe anchor latch and buckle. Makesure the belt is not twisted. Push theanchor latch until it locks. Thenfollow the procedure for fasteningand positioning an ordinary seat belt(see page ).

To unlatch the detachable anchor,insert a key into the slot on the sideof the small buckle. Line up thetriangle marks on the plate andbuckle when reattaching the belt andbuckle.

15


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

ANCHORBUCKLE

TRIANGLEMARKS

ANCHORLATCH

Using a seat belt with thedetachable seat belt anchorunlatched increases the chanceof serious injury or death in acrash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachable seatbelt anchor is correctly latched.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２３：３９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００２２　

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.


18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２３：４５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００２３　

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.


CONTINUED

Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

０６／０７／２６　１７：２３：５３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００２４　

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.


20

０６／０７／２６　１７：２３：５８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００２５　

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

88

30 31

CONTINUED

On Touring model

Seat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

０６／０７／２６　１７：２４：０６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００２６　

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallockable retractor that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any objects hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

Any objects, such as a folded-downsecond row seat, that is touchingthe rear of the seat-back.

14

52

Lap/Shoulder Belt


22

０６／０７／２６　２０：４４：０１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００２７　

CONTINUED

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

The lap/shoulder belt in the centerseating position on the third seat andthe stowable second row plus-oneseat (depending on models) isequipped with a detachable anchorthat has two parts: a small latch plateand an anchor buckle.

The detachable seat belt shouldnormally be latched whenever theseat-backs are in an upright position.For more information about thedetachable seat belt, see page .15


Automatic Seat Belt TensionersD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

23

０６／０７／２６　１７：２４：２２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００２８　

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy, or if a sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over (see page

).

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

If a side airbag or side curtain airbagdeploys during a side impact, thetensioner on that side of the vehiclewill also deploy.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

378

33

HondaWarranty Information

do not deploy


Seat Belt Maintenance

24

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２４：３１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００２９　

CONTINUED

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

(8) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(9) Front Impact Sensors(10) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(11) Side Impact Sensors

(15) Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) Indicator

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Side Curtain Airbag(7) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor

(12) Occupant Position DetectionSystem (OPDS) Sensors

(13) Front Passenger’s Weight sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit

(14) Rear Safing Sensor

(9)(2)

(15)

(5)(11)

(4)(11)

(6)

(11)

(14)

(11)

(1)

(3)

(11) (4)

(7)(11)

(8)

(5)

(12)(13)

(10)

０６／０７／２６　１７：２４：３８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００３０　

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and a frontpassenger’s seat belt is latched orunlatched (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact,side impact, or if your vehicle isabout to rollover.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

2723

30

31

33

32

30

21


26

０６／０７／２６　１７：２４：４６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００３１　

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

A rollover sensor that can detect ifyour vehicle is about to roll overand signal the control unit todeploy both side curtain airbagsand front seat belt tensioners (seepage ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

33

34

35

35

CONTINUED

How Your Front Airbags Work


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

０６／０７／２６　１７：２４：５５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００３２　

After inflating, the front airbags willimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the airbag helps protect yourhead and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).35


28

０６／０７／２６　１７：２５：０１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００３３　

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

CONTINUED

Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

is latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

０６／０７／２６　１７：２５：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００３４　

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

Second-row passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.


Advanced Airbags

30

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

０６／０７／２６　１７：２５：１９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００３５　

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner.

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A second row passenger pushingor pulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat, thefloor behind it, or a folded secondrow seat.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is properlypositioned on the floor (see page

). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the front passenger’s seat and itssensors.

378

35

CONTINUED

How Your Side Airbags Work


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

０６／０７／２６　１７：２５：２８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００３６　

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if thesensors in the seat detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

35Side Airbag Cutoff System


32

０６／０７／２６　１７：２５：３６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００３７　

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the rollover sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over, it signalsthe control unit, which immediatelydeploys both side curtain airbags andactivates both front seat belttensioners.

The airbag on the passenger’s sidewill deploy, and the seat belttensioner will activate, even if thereare no passengers on that side of thevehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

In a Side Impact

In a Rollover

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

０６／０７／２６　１７：２５：４３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００３８　

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on for several seconds thengoes off. This tells you the system isworking properly.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKAIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).88

On Touring models


How the SRS Indicator Works

34

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２５：５１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００３９　

CONTINUED

This indicatoralerts you that thepassenger’s side

airbag has been automatically shutoff. It does mean there is aproblem with your side airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on for several secondsand then go off (see page ). If itdoesn’t come on, stays on, or comeson while driving without a passengerin the front seat, have the systemchecked.

You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGERSIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

68

89

On Touring models


How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

not mean

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

CanadaU.S.

Canada

U.S.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２６：０２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００４０　

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any objects hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

Any objects, such as a folded-downback seat, that are touching therear of the seat-back.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts worn during the crash tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.


Airbag Service

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

36

０６／０７／２６　１７：２６：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００４１　

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water oranother liquid soaks into the seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

０６／０７／２６　１７：２６：１６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００４２　

－

－－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to properly protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

435956

59

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

38

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２６：２５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００４３　

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children aged 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.Some states have laws restrictingwhere children may ride.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

35

56

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.Infants

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

０６／０７／２６　１７：２６：３５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００４４　

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models


40

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

SUN VISORS

０６／０７／２６　１７：２６：４７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００４５　

－

Your vehicle has two rows of backseats where children can be properlyrestrained. If you ever have to carrya group of children, and a child mustride in front:

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in a backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


56

171

18

15

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Additional Safety Precautions


Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

０６／０７／２６　１７：２６：５８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００４６　

－

If a childwraps a loose seat belt aroundtheir neck, they can be seriouslyor fatally injured. (See pages

and for how to activateand deactivate the lockableretractor.)

This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out (seepage ).

Thiswill prevent unintended use of thedoors.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the tailgate,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

51 52

160


Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor isactivated, and the belt is fullyretracted and locked.

Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Use the power sliding door mainswitch to prevent children fromoperating the sliding doors.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle. Keep vehicle keys and remote

transmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.

42

０６／０７／２６　１７：２７：０５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００４７　

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed in thesecond row, a rear-facing child seatmay prevent the driver or a frontpassenger from moving their seat asfar back as recommended, or fromlocking their seat-back in the desiredposition.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the secondor third row, but not in the front.

It can also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

０６／０７／２６　１７：２７：１４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００４８　

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type


44

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２７：２１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００４９　

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

35

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２７：２７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００５０　

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the rear seatingpositions.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

48

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat

46

０６／０７／２６　１７：２７：３６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００５１　

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

０６／０７／２６　１７：２７：４２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００５２　

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat in a second row seat:

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) in the two second rowseats and the center seating positionof the third row.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH


48

LOWERANCHORS

BUTTON

Rigid type

０６／０７／２６　１７：２７：５２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００５３　

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connector as shownabove.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted, then tighten the strapaccording to the seat maker’sinstructions.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint, over the seat-back andthrough the grab rail.4.

5. 6.

7.

174


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

ANCHORFlexible type

TETHERSTRAP HOOK

TETHER STRAP

０６／０７／２６　１７：２８：００　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００５４　

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat in the center seating position ofthe third row:

Unlatch the detachable seat beltanchor latch and retract the seatbelt all the way into the ceiling.Place the latch plate and anchorlatch in their holding slots (seepage ).

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

Follow steps 1 through 4 of thesecond row installation on pages

and .

The center seating position of thethird row has an anchorage point onthe tailgate sill.

Slide the anchor cover to open it.

1.

2. 3.

48

16

49


50

ANCHORAGE POINT

BUTTON

LOWER ANCHORS

０６／０７／２６　１７：２８：０７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００５５　

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

If you intend to install a child seat inthe center seating position of thethird row, make sure the detachableseat belt is properly installed (seepage ).

Remove the head restraint (seepage ). Make sure the removedhead restraint is secured in thecargo area. Reinstall the headrestraint when the child seat isremoved.

Follow steps 6 and 7 on page .

1.4.

5.

174

49

16

CONTINUED


Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

TETHER STRAPHOOK ANCHOR

０６／０７／２６　１７：２８：１７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００５６　

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

5.4.2.

3.


52

０６／０７／２６　１７：２８：２５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００５７　

Each second row bucket seat has atether anchorage point at the bottomof the seat-back.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe second or third row seats.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

1.51

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Second Row Installation


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

53

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

TETHERSTRAP

０６／０７／２６　１７：２８：３２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００５８　

The center seating position of thethird row has an anchorage point onthe tailgate sill.

Each outside seating position of thethird row has an anchorage point onthe seat-back.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

2.

3.

Third Row Installation


54

ANCHORAGE POINT

Center seating positionTETHERSTRAPHOOK

ANCHOR ANCHORAGE POINTS

Outside seating position

０６／０７／２６　１７：２８：４０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００５９　

Remove the head restraint (seepage ). Make sure the removed head restraint is securedin the cargo area. Reinstall the head restraint when the child seatis removed.

To use the anchor, pull up theanchor cover.

Slide the anchor cover to open it.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), route thetether strap over the top of theseat-back.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the tetherstrap is not twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

2.

3.

1.

(Outside seating position)

(Center seating position)

4. 5.

51

174


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

55

Outside seating position

TETHER STRAP HOOK

Center seating position

ANCHORTETHER STRAP HOOKANCHOR

０６／０７／２６　１７：２８：４９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００６０　

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

56

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２８：５６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００６１　

A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intendto drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

3.

4.

5.

46

CONTINUED

Using a Booster Seat


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

57

０６／０７／２６　１７：２９：０５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００６２　

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

15 56

Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront


58

０６／０７／２６　１７：２９：１３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００６３　

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

59

０６／０７／２６　１７：２９：２１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００６４　

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the tailgate open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem/climate control system asshown below.Have the exhaust system inspected

for leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Set the fan speed to high.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

60

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０６／０７／２６　１７：２９：２９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００６５　

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

CONTINUED

Canadian models

U.S. models only

U.S. models

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

61

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

０６／０７／２６　１７：２９：４１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００６６　

U.S. models Canadian models U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels

62

HOOD DOORJAMB

RADIATOR CAP

０６／０７／２６　１７：３０：００　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００６７　

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 64......................Instrument Panel . 65, 66

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 67.............................................Gauges . 77

.............Multi-Information Display . 81Controls Near the Steering

.........................................Wheel . 136

Windshield Wipers and.....................................Washers . 137

Rear Window Wiper and.......................................Washer . 138

.........Turn Signal and Headlights . 138......Instrument Panel Brightness . 142

...............Hazard Warning Button . 143

...............Rear Window Defogger . 143........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 144

.............................Keys and Locks . 145......................Immobilizer System . 146

..............................Ignition Switch . 147.....................Remote Transmitter . 148

Opening or Closing the Power.........................Sliding Doors . 151

Opening or Closing the Power..................................Tailgate . 151

....................................Door Locks . 154....................Power Door Locks . 154

Auto Door Locking/..............................Unlocking . 155

............Childproof Door Locks . 160..........................................Tailgate . 160

..........................Power Tailgate . 161.................................Sliding Doors . 164

...............................................Seats . 170

..................................Seat Heaters . 184Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 185............................Power Windows . 187

.......................................Moonroof . 190...........................................Mirrors . 191

...............................Parking Brake . 192.Adjustable Driver’s Foot Pedals . 193

.........Interior Convenience Items . 194..........Retractable Center Tray . 195

.....................Beverage Holders . 195................Integrated Sunshade . 197

....................Sunglasses Holder . 198................Conversation Mirror . 198

...................................Sun Visor . 199............................Vanity Mirror . 199

...................Rear Compartment . 199Removable Second Row

..................................Console . 200...............In-Floor Storage Area . 201

..............................Glove Boxes . 204...........................Center Pocket . 205

...............................Coin Pocket . 205........Accessory Power Sockets . 206

.......................AC Power Outlet . 206...............................Interior Lights . 208

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

０６／０７／２６　１７：３０：０４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００６８　

Control Locations

64

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKETS

GAUGESHEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM/CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES

GLOVE BOXES

RETRACTABLECENTER TRAY

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MIRRORCONTROLS

POWERDOOR LOCKSWITCH

FUEL FILLDOOR RELEASEHANDLE

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEMBUTTONS

(P.65, 66)(P.77)

(P.191)

(P.154)

(P.185)

(P.187)

(P.307)

(P.308) (P.192) (P.206) (P.195)

(P.204)

(P.214)

(P.184)

(P.322)

０６／０７／２６　１７：３０：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００６９　

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrolsLX, EX and EX-L models

65

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR

IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMINDICATOR

POWER SLIDINGDOOR INDICATOR

DOOR ANDTAILGATE OPENINDICATOR

CHARGINGSYSTEMINDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

FUEL ECONOMYINDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATORLAMP

MAINTENANCEMINDERINDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

LOW OILPRESSUREINDICATOR

TIRE PRESSUREMONITORING SYSTEM(TPMS) INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM (ABS)INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINTSYSTEM (SRS)INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

SECURITYSYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.70)

(P.72)

(P.75)

(P.67, 409)

(P.67, 410) (P.76) (P.67, 409)

(P.72)

(P.69, 411)

(P.34, 67)

(P.75)

(P.76)

(P.21, 68)

(P.35, 68)

(P.74)

(P.69, 328)

(P.75)

(P.71, 333)

(P.71, 332)

(P.70)(P.70)(P.74)(P.75)

０６／０７／２６　１７：３０：１９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００７０　

＊ The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel

Touring models

66

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

FOG LIGHTINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMINDICATOR

LOW OILPRESSUREINDICATOR

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR

LOW FUELINDICATOR

DOOR AND TAILGATEOPEN INDICATOR

VSAACTIVATIONINDICATOR

FUEL ECONOMYINDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

SYSTEMMESSAGEINDICATOR

LIGHTS ONINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST SYSTEM(VSA) INDICATOR

CRUISE MAININDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM (ABS)INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEMINDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

PARKING BRAKEAND BRAKESYSTEMINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEM(SRS) INDICATOR

(P.67, 409)

(P.72)

(P.75)

(P.67, 410)

(P.67, 409) (P.34, 67)

(P.72)

(P.69, 411)

(P.76)

(P.21, 68)

(P.35, 68)

(P.74)

(P.75)

(P.69, 328)

(P.75)

(P.71, 332)

(P.75)(P.70)(P.70) (P.70)

(P.72)

(P.76)

０６／０７／２６　１７：３０：２９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００７１　

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. If this indicator comes on when the

engine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

For more information, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKCHARGING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,side curtain airbags, automatic seatbelt tensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKAIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

410

88

409

88

409

88

34

88

On Touring models

On Touring models

On Touring models

On Touring models

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

０６／０７／２６　１７：３０：４０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００７２　

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGERSIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

21

88

35

89

On Touring modelsOn Touring models


Side Airbag OffIndicator

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

68

U.S. Canada

０６／０７／２６　１７：３０：４９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００７３　

CONTINUED

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to the START (III)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

This indicator has two functions:It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

You will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

If it remains on after you havefully released the parking brakewhile the engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUIDLOW’’ or ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

1.

2.

328

8988

411

88

On Touring models

On Touring models

On Touring models


Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Parking Brake andBrake SystemIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

CanadaU.S.

０６／０７／２６　１７：３０：５９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００７４　

This indicator has three functions:This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willgo off if you have inserted aproperly-coded ignition key. If it isnot a properly-coded key, theindicator will blink and the enginewill not start (see page ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page

for more information on theVSA system.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. See page for moreinformation.

1.

2.

3.146

330

89

330

89

330

On Touring models

On Touring models

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation IndicatorImmobilizer SystemIndicator


70

０６／０７／２６　１７：３１：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００７５　

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).You may see one or more of the lowpressure tire positions displayedalong with this message.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are extremely low onpressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe. If it is becauseof a flat tire, replace the flat tire withthe compact spare (see page ),and have the flat tire repaired assoon as possible. If two or more tiresare underinflated, call a professionaltowing service (see page ). Formore information, see page .

Check the tire pressure monitor onthe multi-information display anddetermine the cause (see page ).

Your vehicle has Michelin PAX tires.Repair or replacement of PAX tiresmust be done by a Honda dealer oran authorized Michelin PAX systemdealer. For more information, seepage .

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.

396

418332

88

334

392

On Touring models


Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

０６／０７／２６　１７：３１：２０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００７６　

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. See page

for information on fog lightoperation.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door and remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

On Touring models, this indicatoralso comes on when the light switchis in AUTO and the lights turn onautomatically.

372 375

139

141

141

On Canadian models

On Touring models


Turn Signal and Hazard WarningIndicators

Lights On Indicator High Beam Indicator

Fog Light Indicator

72

０６／０７／２６　１７：３１：３１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００７７　

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemin the high beam headlight’s circuit.Have your vehicle checked by yourdealer.

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRLSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display, there is aproblem in the high beam headlight’scircuit. Take your vehicle to a dealerto have it checked (see page ).

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcomes on (see page ).

You will also see a ‘‘WASHERFLUID LOW’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

89

89

366

On Canadian modelsOn Canadian LX, EX and EX-L models

On Canadian Touring model



Daytime Running LightsIndicator

Washer Level IndicatorInstrum

entsand

Controls

73

WASHER LEVEL INDICATORDAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)INDICATOR

０６／０７／２６　１７：３１：３９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００７８　

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, there isa problem in the power sliding doorsystem. With this indicator on, movethe main switch on the dashboard tothe OFF position, and have thesystem checked by your dealer assoon as possible. You can still openor close each sliding door manually.For more information on the powersliding doors, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘FUEL LOW’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. Itcomes on as a reminder that youmust refuel soon. When the indicatorcomes on, there is about 3.01 US gal(11.4 ) of fuel remaining in the tankbefore the reading reaches E. Thereis a small reserve of fuel remainingin the tank when the reading doesreach E.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK LEFTSLIDING DOOR’’ or ‘‘CHECKRIGHT SLIDING DOOR’’ messageon the multi-information display (seepage ).

89

164

89

On EX and EX-L models

On Touring models

On Touring models

Power SlidingDoor Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator


74

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

U.S. Canada

０６／０７／２６　１７：３１：４７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００７９　

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel (see page ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

While the engine is operating in itsmost economical range, thisindicator may come on and stay on.It goes off when your vehicle usesextra fuel.

The appropriate light comes on inthis monitor if the tailgate or anydoor is not closed tightly.

All the lights in the monitor come onfor a few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

The door and tailgate open monitoralso appears on the multi-informationdisplay.

291

291

On EX-L and Touring models

On Touring modelsCruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Fuel Economy Indicator

Door and Tailgate Open Monitor


Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

０６／０７／２６　１７：３１：５６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００８０　

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Itreminds you that it is time to takeyour vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance. The maintenance mainitems and sub items will be displayedin the information display. See page

for more information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

This indicator comes on when thereis a system message on the multi-information display. Press the INFObutton on the steering wheel (seepage ) to see the message (seepage ).

Most of the time, this indicatorcomes on along with other indicatorsin the instrument panel such as theseat belt reminder indicator, SRSindicator, VSA system indicator, etc. This indicator comes on when the

security system is set. For moreinformation, see page .

347

8287

290

On LX, EX and EX-L models On Touring models


Maintenance MinderIndicator

System MessageIndicator

Security System Indicator

76

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０６／０７／２６　１７：３２：０５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００８１　

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, the pointermay rise to the upper zone. If itreaches the red (hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem, see page .407

Temperature Gauge

Fuel Gauge

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

SPEEDOMETER

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

FUEL GAUGE

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

TACHOMETER

LX, EX and EX-L models

Touring models

SELECT/RESET KNOB

SELECT/RESET KNOBINFORMATION DISPLAY

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０６／０７／２６　１７：３２：１４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００８２　

For information about the multi-information display, see page .

The information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation when the ignition switchis in the ON (II) position. Some ofthe information helps to keep youdriving safely.Other information helps to keep youaware of the periodic maintenanceyour vehicle needs for continuedtrouble-free driving.

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the Select/Reset knob repeatedly.

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Select/Resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

To change the display, push theSelect/Reset knob on the instrumentpanel repeatedly until the desiredinformation appears.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, what you lastselected is displayed.

81


On Touring models

Gauges

Information Display

Odometer Trip Meter

78

０６／０７／２６　１７：３２：２３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００８３　

± ±

－－－－－－－－

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSelect/Reset knob until thetemperature is displayed.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your vehicle speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°Cin Canadian models) warmer orcooler.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

To adjust the outside temperatureindicator, press and hold the Select/Reset knob for 10 seconds. Thefollowing sequence will appear for 1second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4,

3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the Select/Reset knob. You should see the newoutside temperature displayed.

CONTINUED


Gauges

Outside Temperature IndicatorInstrum

entsand

Controls

79

０６／０７／２６　１７：３２：３０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００８４　

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

Your vehicle’s onboard diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.

Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the select/reset knob.

The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messagewill appear each time you restart theengine until the system turns themessage off.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

347

410

Gauges

Maintenance Minder Check Fuel Cap Message

80

０６／０７／２６　１７：３２：３７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００８５　

The multi-information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation and messages when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. Some of the messages helpyou operate your vehicle morecomfortably.Others help to keep you aware of theperiodic maintenance your vehicleneeds for continued trouble-freedriving.

You can also customize some vehiclecontrol settings to your liking withthe multi-information display and thetwo buttons on the steering wheel(see page ).

When you unlock and open thedriver’s door with the remotetransmitter, the display shows‘‘Welcome DRIVER 1’’ or ‘‘WelcomeDRIVER 2’’ depending on whichremote transmitter you use. Thedriver’s ‘‘ID’’ is detected by thetransmitter. For more informationabout driver’s ‘‘ID’’, see page .

If you use the key to unlock thedriver’s door, the display only shows‘‘Welcome.’’ This means the systemcannot recognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’or ‘‘DRIVER 2.’’ In this case, youcannot use the customized settingson the multi-information display (seepage ).When you turn the ignition switch tothe ACCESSORY (I) position, thedisplay shows ‘‘Goodbye.’’

101

152101

CONTINUED

On Touring models only Normal Display Messages

Multi-Information Display

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

０６／０７／２６　１７：３２：４４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００８６　

The multi-information displayconsists of two segments; an uppersegment and a lower segment.

To change the display, press theINFO button on the steering wheelrepeatedly until the desiredinformation appears (see page ).

Messages in the trip computerinclude:

In normal display mode, the uppersegment displays the trip computer.The lower segment displays theodometer, Trip A/B, outsidetemperature, compass, and engineoil life and maintenance message.

INST. MPG (U.S. models)/INST.L/100 km (Canadianmodels): Your vehicle’s currentfuel mileage.

When you turn off the engine,INST. MPG or INST. L/100 km isalso reset.

RANGE: The estimated distanceyou can travel on the fuelremaining in the tank. Thisdistance is estimated from the fueleconomy you received over thelast several miles, so it will varywith changes in speed, traffic, etc.

When the battery is disconnected,or you refuel, RANGE is also reset.

84


82

LOWER SEGMENT

UPPER SEGMENT INFO BUTTON

SEL/RESET BUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：３２：５３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００８７　

CONTINUED

AVERAGE FUEL A/B: Thisshows your vehicle’s average fueleconomy in mpg (U.S. models) or/100 km (Canadian models)

since you last reset Trip A or TripB. When you select Trip B in thelower segment by pressing theSEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel, or the Select/Reset knob on the instrumentpanel, AVERAGE FUEL B appearson the upper segment.

You can customize the Trip A andAVERAGE FUEL A reset conditionin the multi-information display (seepage ).

The average fuel mileage will bereset when you reset the trip meter,or if the vehicle’s battery goes deador is disconnected.

ELAPSED TIME: The timetraveled since you last reset thetrip computer.When you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position, ELAPSEDTIME is reset.

You can customize the ELAPSEDTIME reset condition in the multi-information display (see page

).

AVERAGE SPEED: The averagespeed you are traveling.

When you reset Trip A,AVERAGE SPEED is also reset.

117

112


Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

０６／０７／２６　１７：３３：０１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００８８　

If you press the INFO button whileAVERAGE FUEL is displayed, youwill see the tire pressure monitor inboth segments. This monitor is apart of the tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS). See page formore information.

Pressing the INFO button againbrings the display back to the initialdisplay of the trip computer ‘‘INST.MPG’’ (U.S. models) or ‘‘INST. L/100 km’’ (Canadian models).

334


84

Press the INFO button

０６／０７／２６　１７：３３：０６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００８９　

In the lower segment, each time youpress the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel, the display changesfrom ‘‘Trip A/Odometer’’ to ‘‘Trip A/Outside Temperature’’ to ‘‘Trip B/Outside Temperature’’ to ‘‘EngineOil Life’’, and then back to the ‘‘TripA/Odometer’’ as shown in the nextcolumn.

You can also change the display bypushing the select/reset knob in theinstrument panel.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, what you lastselected is displayed.

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.


Odometer

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

Press theSEL/RESETbutton

０６／０７／２６　１７：３３：１２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００９０　

In the left corner of the lowersegment, a compass indicates whichdirection your vehicle is pointed.

You can customize the

The multi-information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

You can customize the Trip A andAVERAGE FUEL A reset conditionin the multi-information display (seepage ).

When you reset Trip A, AVERAGEFUEL A is reset at the same time.When you reset Trip B, AVERAGEFUEL B is reset.

To reset a trip meter, display it, thenpress and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’.

While a trip meter is displayed, youcan change the display between‘‘Trip A’’ and ‘‘Trip B’’ by pressingthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel, or the select/resetknob on the instrument panel.

112114

347

in the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).


Compass Maintenance MinderTrip Meter

CompassZone Selection

86

COMPASSENGINE OIL LIFE

MAINTENANCESERVICE ITEM (S)

０６／０７／２６　１７：３３：２２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００９１　

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your vehicle speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

You can adjust the outsidetemperature in the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

If there is a problem with yourvehicle, for example, the engine oillevel is low or a door is not fullyclosed, the multi-information displaywill show you the problem. It doesthis by interrupting the currentdisplay with one or more messages.

Here is a list of messages shown onthe multi-information display:

This shows the outside temperaturein Fahrenheit (U.S. models), or inCentigrade (Canadian models).

110

CONTINUED


Outside Temperature Display System MessagesInstrum

entsand

Controls

87

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

０６／０７／２６　１７：３３：３０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００９２　

See page94, 300

See page11, 91

See page21, 91

See page91, 411

See page93, 411

See page97, 411

See page95, 333

See page94, 332

See page100, 392

See page96, 409

See page96, 409

See page97, 410

See page97

See page34, 98


88

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

Canada

U.S.

０６／０７／２６　１７：３３：４６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００９３　

＊

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

: Canadian model only

: Canadian model only

See page98, 328

See page96, 330

See page35, 94

See page99, 141

See page99, 163

See page99, 169

See page98, 301

See page93

See page92

See page93

See page95, 349

See page92


Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

Canada

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

U.S.

０６／０７／２６　１７：３４：０１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００９４　

The system message(s) triggers theappropriate indicator(s) on theinstrument panel, including thesystem message indicator, to comeon. The system message indicatordoes not go off until the problem(s)is corrected.

You will also hear a beep when thesystem message indicator comes onfor the first time.

Most of the messages are displayedfor about 5 seconds, and then thenormal display returns. If there areseveral system messages to beshown, the display switches thesemessages every 5 seconds.

To cancel the message(s) before 5seconds elapsed, press the INFObutton on the steering wheel.

Even if you press the INFO button,some messages stay on or come onagain at regular intervals until theproblem is corrected:

FASTEN SEAT BELTFASTEN PASSENGER SEATBELTRELEASE PARKING BRAKEWARNING: APPROCHINGOBJECTPAX SYSTEM WARNING

You can see the message(s) again bypressing the INFO button repeatedlyif the system message indicatorremains lit on the instrument panel.

(U.S. Touring model only)


90

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

０６／０７／２６　１７：３４：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００９５　

If you start driving without releasingthe parking brake, the multi-information display interrupts thecurrent display and shows‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE.’’This message continues, and achime sounds, until you release theparking brake, or the vehicle speedslows down to less than 0.5 mph (0.8km/h).

If the tailgate or any door(s) is notclosed tightly, the display remindsyou to close the tailgate or thedoor(s) before you start driving.This display continues until youclose the door(s) or the tailgate.Pressing the INFO button on thesteering wheel momentarily changethe display to the normal display, butit will come back after 5 seconds.

In addition to the seat belt reminderindicator on the instrument panel,the multi-information displayinterrupts the current display andshows ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ or‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER SEATBELT’’ if you or your frontpassenger do not fasten your seatbelts while driving. This messageremains displayed if you ignore itand do not wear your seat belts whilethe vehicle is moving. CONTINUED


Fasten Seat Belt Door and Tailgate Open Release Parking BrakeInstrum

entsand

Controls

91

U.S.

Canada

０６／０７／２６　１７：３４：２０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００９６　

If you leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door, you will see‘‘REMOVE KEY’’ on the display andhear a reminder beeper.

Your vehicle’s on board diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay. Turn the engine off, andconfirm the fuel fill cap is installed. Ifit is, loosen it, then retighten it untilit clicks at least once. The messageshould go off after several days ofnormal driving once you tighten or

replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll toanother message, press the INFObutton. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’message will appear each time yourestart the engine until the systemturns the message off.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .410


Remove Key Tighten Fuel Cap

92

０６／０７／２６　１７：３４：２７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００９７　

If the brake fluid level is at or belowthe MIN mark on the side of thebrake fluid reservoir in the enginecompartment, you will see ‘‘BRAKEFLUID LOW.’’ If you see thismessage, have the brake systemchecked by your dealer (see page

).

If the fluid level in the windshieldwasher reservoir gets low, you willsee ‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ on themulti-information display.

If the level of the fuel in the tankgets low, you will see ‘‘FUEL LOW’’on the multi-information display, andyou must refuel soon. The low fuelindicator on the instrument panel willalso come on.

411

CONTINUED

On Canadian model only


Brake Fluid Low Fuel Low Washer Fluid LowInstrum

entsand

Controls

93

U.S.

Canada

０６／０７／２６　１７：３４：３６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００９８　

This message, and the indicator tothe left of the message, is part of theparking sensor system. If you areapproaching too close to an object,you will see ‘‘WARNING:APPROACHING OBJECT’’ on thedisplay and hear a beeper. See page

for more information.

If the passenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off, you will see‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’on the multi-information display. Seepage for more information.

If one or more of your vehicle tiresare low on pressure, you will see a‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message on the display. See page

for more information on the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS).

35 332

300


Passenger Side Airbag Off Check Tire Pressure Warning: Approaching Object

94

U.S.

Canada

０６／０７／２６　１７：３４：４５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　００９９　

CONTINUED

When the engine oil life reaches 15 %,the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ and the code for themaintenance items to be performed.

When the engine oil life reaches 5 %,the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUENOW’’ along with the samemaintenance items.

If there is a problem in the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS),you will see ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ on the multi-informationdisplay. If you see this message, theTPMS is not monitoring tirepressures. Have the TPMS checkedby your dealer as soon as possible(see page ).

Have your dealer do the indicatedmaintenance as soon as you see thismessage, and have them reset thedisplay after completing the service.

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance or do not reset thedisplay, the message changes to‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ when theengine oil life becomes 0 %.

These messages appear on the multi-information display each time youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

For details on engine oil life andmaintenance messages, refer to page

.

Also refer to page for importantmaintenance safety precautions.

349

346

336


Maintenance Messages Check TPMS SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

95

０６／０７／２６　１７：３４：５６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１００　

If you see ‘‘CHECK CHARGINGSYSTEM’’ on the multi-informationdisplay, it means the battery is notbeing charged. See page formore information.

If the engine oil is very low or haslost pressure, you will see ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ on the multi-information display. You will also seethe low oil pressure indicator in theinstrument panel flashing or stayingon. If you see this message, youshould take immediate action sinceserious engine damage is possible.Follow the procedure on page .

If there is a problem with the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system, youwill see ‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ onthe multi-information display. If yousee this message, have the VSAsystem checked by your dealer (seepage ).330

409

409


Check Charging SystemCheck Engine Oil LevelCheck VSA System

96

０６／０７／２６　１７：３５：０４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１０１　

CONTINUED

If there is a problem with theautomatic transmission, you will see‘‘CHECK TRANSMISSION’’ on themulti-information display. Avoidrapid acceleration, and have thetransmission checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

If there is a problem with the brakesystem, you will see ‘‘CHECKBRAKE SYSTEM’’ on the multi-information display. The parkingbrake and brake system indicator inthe instrument panel will also comeon. See page for moreinformation.

If you see ‘‘CHECK EMISSIONSYSTEM’’ on the multi-informationdisplay, it means one of the engine’semission systems may have aproblem. Have your vehicle checkedby your dealer (see page ).

411410


Check TransmissionCheck Brake SystemCheck Emission SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

97

U.S.

Canada

０６／０７／２６　２０：４４：１１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１０２　

If there is a problem with theparking sensor system, the multi-information display shows a‘‘CHECK PARKING SENSORSYSTEM’’ message. See page


If there is a problem in the anti-lockbrake system (ABS), you will see‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ on themulti-information display. If you seethis message, have your vehiclechecked by a dealer (see page ).

If there is a problem with your frontairbags, side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,automatic seat belt tensioners, sidecurtain airbags, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors, you will see‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ on themulti-information display. Take yourvehicle to a dealer as soon aspossible (see page ).

328

34

301


Check Parking Sensor SystemCheck Airbag SystemCheck ABS System

98

０６／０７／２６　１７：３５：２０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１０３　

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRLSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display, there is aproblem in the high beam headlight’scircuit. Take your vehicle to a dealerto have it checked.

If there is a problem with the powertailgate, the display shows ‘‘CHECKPOWER TAILGATE.’’ See page


If there is a problem with eitherpower sliding door, the multi-information display shows ‘‘CHECKLEFT SLIDING DOOR’’ or ‘‘CHECKRIGHT SLIDING DOOR.’’ See page

for more information.169

161

CONTINUED

On Canadian model only


Check DRL SystemCheck Power TailgateCheck Left/Right Sliding DoorInstrum

entsand

Controls

99

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

０６／０７／２６　１７：３５：３０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１０４　

Your vehicle is equipped with theMichelin PAX system. The PAXsystem uses the multi-informationdisplay to show you one of threemessages while you are driving witha flat tire.

For more information, see page .392On U.S. model only


PAX Warning Messages

100

０６／０７／２６　１７：３５：３７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１０５　

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, press and hold theINFO button for more than 3seconds. ‘‘CUSTOMIZE ENTRY’’appears on the multi-informationdisplay.

You can customize some vehiclecontrol settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately.

To have the driver’s ID detected,make sure you use your transmitterto unlock the driver’s door.

If you use the key to unlock thedriver’s door, the system cannotrecognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or‘‘DRIVER 2.’’ In this case, when youtry to enter the customizing mode,‘‘DRIVER UNKNOWNCUSTOMIZE IMPOSSIBLE’’ will bedisplayed, and you cannot customizethe settings.

Refer to the table on the followingpages about the settings you want tocustomize.

Use the INFO button on the steeringwheel to see the settings, and theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselections.

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ asdescribed on page .

If you want to change any vehiclecontrol settings, select ‘‘CHANGESETTING,’’ and follow theinstructions on page .

The first customizing menu is:CHANGE SETTINGDEFAULT ALL

You cannot customize the settingsunder these conditions:

If you turn the ignition switch tothe ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK(0) position.

If you move the shift lever out ofPark.

You can cancel each custom setting(Driver 1, Driver 2). Press and holdthe LOCK and SLIDING DOORbutton (passenger’s side) at thesame time until the LED in theremote transmitter will blink twice.At this time, the custom setting ischanged to the default setting. Toactivate each custom setting (Driver1, Driver 2), repeat this procedure.The LED will blink for 1 second toindicate the custom setting has beenactivated.

106

104

CONTINUED

Customized Settings


Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

０６／０７／２６　１７：３５：４９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１０６　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－～± ～－～± ～

～～

＊

Setting OptionENGLISHFRENCHSPANISH

5F° 0°F 5F° (U.S.)3C° 0°C 3C°

(Canada)ONOFF1 8 15

IGN RESETTRIP A RESETTRIP B RESETONOFF15 sec30 sec60 sec0 sec15 sec30 sec60 sec

Menu ItemLANGUAGESELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDETEMP. DISPLAY

TRIP A & AVG. FUELRESET with REFUELCOMPASS ZONESELECTIONELAPSED TIMERESET

MEMORY POSITIONLINKINTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME

HEADLIGHT AUTOOFF TIMER

Group SetupMETER SETUP(P. 107)

POSITION SETUP(P. 119)LIGHTINGSETUP(P. 121)

Page108

110

112

114

117

119

121

123

DescriptionChanges the language used in the display.

Changes the outside temperature reading above orbelow its current reading.

Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy toreset when you refuel.Selects the zone number if the direction of yourvehicle differs from true north.Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.

Changes the driver’s seat to a stored setting.

Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights stayon after you close the doors.

Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lightsstay on after you close the driver’s door.

: Default setting


102

０６／０７／２６　１７：３５：５４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１０７　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Setting OptionSHIFT FROM PWITH VEH SPEEDOFFDRIVER’S DOOR WITHSHIFT TO PALL DOORS WITH SHIFTTO PDRIVER’S DOOR WITHIGN OFFALL DOORS WITH IGNOFFOFFONOFF

30 sec60 sec90 secWITH VEH SPDINTERMITTENTOKCANCEL

DescriptionChanges when the doors automatically lock.

Changes when the doors automatically unlock.

The exterior lights flash each time you press theLOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also soundwhen you press the LOCK button twice.Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the doorsto relock and the security system to set after youunlock the door without opening it.Changes the wiper operation between two settingswhen the wiper switch is in the INT position.Changes all the customized settings to as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory.

Menu ItemAUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

KEYLESS LOCK

SECURTY RELOCKTIMER

WIPER ACTION

Group SetupDOOR · WINDOWSETUP(P. 125)

WIPER SETUP(P. 134)DEFAULT ALL

Page126

128

130

132

134

104

: Default setting

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT


Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

０６／０７／２６　１７：３６：００　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１０８　

To enter the customizing mode,press and hold the INFO button formore than 3 seconds. Then select‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ by pressing theINFO button.

To set the default settings, select‘‘OK’’ by pressing the INFO button,then press the SEL/RESET button.

When ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ iscompleted successfully, you will seethe above display for several seconds,and the display will return to‘‘CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.’’

Press the SEL/RESET button toenter ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’

DEFAULT ALL


104

０６／０７／２６　１７：３６：０６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１０９　

If ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ is not completedsuccessfully, you will see the abovedisplay for several seconds, then thedisplay goes back to the normalmessage mode. Repeat theprocedure to select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’

If you want to cancel ‘‘DEFAULTALL,’’ select ‘‘CANCEL,’’ then pressthe SEL/RESET button. The displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.’’


Instruments

andC

ontrols

105

０６／０７／２６　１７：３６：１１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１１０　

You can customize some of thevehicle control settings to yourpreference. Here are the settingsyou can customize:

While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘CHANGE SETTING,’’press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay will change to the initialdisplay of CUSTOMIZE GROUP.Then, each time you press the INFObutton, the display changes as shownin the next column.Press the INFO button until you seethe setup you want to customize, andpress the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.

DOOR · WINDOW SETUP (seepage )

METER SETUP (see page )POSITION SETUP (see page

)LIGHTING SETUP (see page

)

WIPER SETUP (see page )

107

119

121

125134

Change Setting


106

Press the SEL/RESET button


０６／０７／２６　１７：３６：２１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１１１　

There are four custom settings itemsin the Meter Setup:

LANGUAGE SELECTION (seepage )ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY (see page )TRIP A & AVG. FUEL A RESETwith REFUEL (see page )COMPASS ZONE SELECTION(see page )

To customize a setting, press theINFO button repeatedly until you seethe setting, and press the SEL/RESET button. Then, follow theprocedures described on thefollowing pages.

While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is displayed,press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then, press theINFO button repeatedly. Each timeyou press the INFO button, thedisplay changes as shown.

ELAPSED TIME RESET (seepage )

108

110

112

114

117

CONTINUED

Meter Setup


Instruments

andC

ontrols

107


０６／０７／２６　１７：３６：３１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１１２　

While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. The display changesto ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION.’’Press the SEL/RESET button againto enter the language selection mode.

There are three selectable languages,English, French, and Spanish. Eachtime you press the INFO button, thedisplay changes as shown.

Select the language you want bypressing the INFO button, and pressthe SEL/RESET button to enteryour selection.

Language Selection


108

０６／０７／２６　１７：３６：３７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１１３　

When language selection issuccessfully completed, the displaychanges to the screen shown abovefor several seconds, then goes backto ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

If you fail to select a languageproperly, you will see the abovedisplay for several seconds, then thedisplay goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEMENU.’’ Repeat the setup.

To exit ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION,’’press the INFO button repeatedlyuntil you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press theSEL/RESET button. The displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

All the messages in the multi-information display will be in thelanguage you selected.

CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

109

０６／０７／２６　１７：３６：４５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１１４　

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay changes as shown above.The highlighted number is thecurrent adjustment above or belowthe outside temperature. Press theINFO button repeatedly until theappropriate number appears, thenpress the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. The display changes to the‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press theINFO button once, and you will see‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY’’ as shown above.

If you find that the temperaturereading is always a few degreesbelow or above the actualtemperature, adjust it as describedon the following columns.


Adjust Outside Temp. Display

110

０６／０７／２６　１７：３６：５１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１１５　

If you fail to enter the desiredadjustment properly, you will see theabove display for several seconds,then the display goes back to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Repeat theadjustment.

To exit ‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY,’’ press the INFO buttonuntil you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and press theSEL/RESET button. The displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

When your selection is successfullyentered, you will see the abovedisplay for several seconds, and thenthe display changes back to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

111

０６／０７／２６　１７：３６：５８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１１６　

To cause ‘‘Trip meter A’’ and‘‘Average Fuel Economy’’ to resetevery time you refuel your vehicle,adjust it as described on thefollowing pages.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘METER SETUP’’ of the‘‘CUSTOMIZE GROUP,’’ press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. The display changes to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press theINFO button repeatedly until you see‘‘TRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESETWITH FUEL’’ in the lower segmentas shown above.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay changes as shown above.The lower segment changesbetween ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’ each timeyou press the INFO button. Enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset with Refuel


112

０６／０７／２６　１７：３７：０４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１１７　

When your selection is successfullyentered, you will see the abovedisplay for several seconds, and thenthe display goes back to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

If you fail to enter your selection,you will see the above display forseveral seconds, then the displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’Repeat the setup.

To exit ‘‘TRIP A & AVG. FUELWITH REFUEL,’’ press the INFObutton until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ andpress the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEMENU.’’

CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

113

０６／０７／２６　１７：３７：１１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１１８　

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. The display changes to the‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press theINFO button repeatedly until you see‘‘COMPASS ZONE SELECTION’’ inthe lower segment as shown above.

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone set into the compass, do theprocedure on the following pages.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay changes as shown above.

On Touring models without navigationsystem

Compass Zone Selection


114

０６／０７／２６　１７：３７：１７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１１９　

CONTINUED

Find the zone for your area on themap shown in the next column.

Press the INFO button until you seeyour zone number in the lowersegment. Then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your zonenumber.


Instruments

andC

ontrols

115

０６／０７／２６　１７：３７：２２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１２０　

If you fail to enter your zone number,you will see the above display forseveral seconds, then the displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’Repeat the setup.

To exit ‘‘COMPASS ZONESELECTION,’’ press the INFObutton until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ andpress the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEMENU.’’

When your zone number issuccessfully entered, you will see theabove display for several seconds,then the display changes to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


116

０６／０７／２６　１７：３７：２８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１２１　

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘METER SETUP’’ of the‘‘CUSTOMIZE GROUP,’’ press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. The display changes to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press theINFO button repeatedly until you see‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET’’ in thelower segment as shown above.


Press the INFO button repeatedlyuntil the desired condition appears,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

There are three possible settings:

IGN RESET: The elapsed timeresets each time the ignition switchis turned to the ON (II) position.

TRIP A RESET: The elapsed timeresets each time the TRIP A is reset.

TRIP B RESET: The elapsed timeresets each time the TRIP B is reset.

CONTINUED


Elapsed Time ResetInstrum

entsand

Controls

117

０６／０７／２６　１７：３７：３６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１２２　

If you fail to enter your selection,you will see the above display forseveral seconds, and the display goesback to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’Repeat the setup.

To exit ‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET,’’press the INFO button until you see‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESETbutton.

When your selection is entered, youwill see the above display for severalseconds, and the display goes backto ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


118

０６／０７／２６　１７：３７：４２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１２３　

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘POSITION SETUP,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. The display changesto ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ asshown above.


If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ is‘‘ON,’’ the driver’s seat moves to theposition stored in the memory whenyou open the driver’s door, using theremote transmitter.

Refer to page for setting the seatposition memory. Also refer to page

for remote transmitter use.

Select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressingthe INFO button, and enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

185

152

CONTINUED

Position Setup Memory Position Setup


Instruments

andC

ontrols

119

０６／０７／２６　１７：３７：５０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１２４　


To exit ‘‘MEMORY POSITIONLINK,’’ press the INFO button untilyou see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is entered, youwill see the above display for severalseconds, then the display goes backto ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


120

０６／０７／２６　１７：３７：５７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１２５　

There are two custom settings in theLighting Setup:


Each time you press the INFObutton, the highlighted numberchanges from ‘‘15 sec,’’ to ‘‘30 sec,’’and then to ‘‘60 sec.’’ To make yourselection, press the SEL/RESETbutton.

INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME (see page )HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER(see page )

While the ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ isdisplayed, press the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheel. Eachtime you press the INFO button, thedisplay changes between‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME’’ and ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTOOFF TIMER.’’ To make yourselection, press the SEL/RESETbutton.

The interior lights fade out when youclose all doors. You can change thetime that the interior lights fade out.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. The display changesto ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME’’ as shown above.

121

123

CONTINUED

Lighting Setup Interior Light Dimming Time


Instruments

andC

ontrols

121

０６／０７／２６　１７：３８：０７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１２６　


To exit ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME,’’ press the INFObutton until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ thenpress the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is entered, youwill see the above display for severalseconds, and then the display goesback to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


122

０６／０７／２６　１７：３８：１３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１２７　

CONTINUED

The headlights, parking lights,taillights, and license plate light turnoff after the selected time when youremove the key from the ignitionswitch and close the driver’s door.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then press theINFO button to display‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’as shown above.


Each time you press the INFObutton, the highlighted numberchanges from ‘‘0 sec,’’ to ‘‘15 sec,’’ to‘‘30 sec,’’ and then to ‘‘60 sec.’’Press the INFO button repeatedlyuntil the desired time appears, thenpress the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.

Headlight Auto Off Timer


Instruments

andC

ontrols

123

０６／０７／２６　１７：３８：２０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１２８　


If you fail to enter your selection,you will see the above display forseveral seconds, and the display goesback ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Repeatthe setup.

To exit ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFFTIMER,’’ press the INFO buttonuntil you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press theSEL/RESET button.


124

０６／０７／２６　１７：３８：２６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１２９　

To customize a setting, press theINFO button repeatedly until you seethe setting you want to customize,and press the SEL/RESET button.Then follow the proceduresdescribed on the following pages.

AUTO DOOR LOCK (see page)

SECURITY RELOCK TIMER (seepage )

KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENT (seepage )

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK (seepage )

There are three custom settings inthe Door · Window Setup:

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘DOOR · WINDOW SETUP,’’press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Each time you pressthe INFO button, the displaychanges as shown in the nextcolumn.

126

128

130

132

CONTINUED


Door · Window SetupInstrum

entsand

Controls

125

Press the INFObutton

０６／０７／２６　１７：３８：３５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１３０　

－

－

－

There are three settings you canchoose from:

OFFThe auto door lock is deactivated allthe time.


Press the INFO button repeatedlyuntil the desired condition appears,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

SHIFT FROM PThe doors lock whenever you movethe shift lever out of Park.

VEHICLE SPEED The doors lockwhen the vehicle speed reaches 10mph (15 km/h).

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP’’press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. The display changesto ‘‘AUTO DOOR LOCK’’ as shownabove.

Auto Door Lock


126

０６／０７／２６　２０：４４：１９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１３１　


To exit ‘‘AUTO DOOR LOCK,’’press the INFO button until you see‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESETbutton.


CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

127

０６／０７／２６　１７：３８：５０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１３２　

－

－

－ While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then press theINFO button once. The displaychanges to ‘‘AUTO DOORUNLOCK’’ as shown above.

There are three settings you canchoose from:

SHIFT TO P The driver’s door orall the doors unlock when you movethe shift lever to Park.

IGN OFF The driver’s door or allthe doors unlock when you turn theignition switch to the LOCK (0)position.

OFF The auto door unlock isdeactivated all the time.


Press the INFO button repeatedlyuntil the desired condition appears,and press the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.

Auto Door Unlock


128

０６／０７／２６　１７：３８：５８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１３３　

CONTINUED



To exit ‘‘AUTO DOOR UNLOCK,’’press the INFO button until you see‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESETbutton.


Instruments

andC

ontrols

129

０６／０７／２６　１７：３９：０４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１３４　

Each time you press the INFObutton, the display changes to ‘‘ON,’’to ‘‘OFF,’’ then to ‘‘EXIT.’’

Select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressingthe INFO button, and enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton on the remote transmitter tounlock the doors and the tailgate, theexterior lights blink twice to verifythat the doors and the tailgate areunlocked and the security system isturned off.

When you push the LOCK button onthe remote transmitter, someexterior lights flash, and a beepersounds when you push the LOCKbutton again within 5 seconds toverify that the doors and the tailgateare locked and the security systemhas set (see page ). You cancustomize the exterior lights not toflash and the beeper not to sound.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then press theINFO button repeatedly until you see‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ as shownabove.


290


Keyless Lock Acknowledgement

130

０６／０７／２６　１７：３９：１２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１３５　

When your selection is entered, youwill see the above display for severalseconds, and then the displaychanges to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


To exit ‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENT,’’ press theINFO button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’then press the SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED


Instruments

andC

ontrols

131

０６／０７／２６　１７：３９：１９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１３６　

If you unlock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitter,but do not open any of the doors orthe tailgate within 30 seconds, thedoors and the tailgate automaticallyrelock and the security system sets.

You can change this relock timefrom 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then press theINFO button repeatedly until you see‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ asshown above.

Press the SEL/RESET button, thenpress the INFO button.

Select the desired relock time bypressing the INFO button, and enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Security Relock Timer


132

０６／０７／２６　１７：３９：２６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１３７　


To exit ‘‘SECURITY RELOCKTIMER,’’ press the INFO buttonuntil you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press theSEL/RESET button.



Instruments

andC

ontrols

133

０６／０７／２６　１７：３９：３２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１３８　

－

－

With ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ shown on themulti-information display, press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. The display changes to‘‘FRONT WIPER ACTION’’ asshown above.

You can select from these twosettings when the wiper switch is inthe INT (intermittent) position:

WITH VEH SPD The intermittentoperation varies according to vehiclespeed.

INTERMITTENT Theintermittent operation variesaccording to the selection you makeon the wiper lever’s intermittentcontrol ring.


Press the INFO button to select‘‘WITH VEH SPD’’ or‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ and enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Wiper Setup Front Wiper Action


134

０６／０７／２６　１７：３９：４０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１３９　

To exit ‘‘FRONT WIPER ACTION,’’press the INFO button until you see‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESETbutton.




Instruments

andC

ontrols

135

０６／０７／２６　１７：３９：４６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１４０　

＊＊

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

1:2:

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

136

POWER TAILGATESWITCH

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

PARKING SENSORSYSTEM SWITCH

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERSREAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

POWER SLIDING DOORSWITCH

MOONROOF SWITCH

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROL BUTTONS



NAVIGATIONSYSTEMBUTTONS

HORN

AUDIO SYSTEM/REARENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM


PASSENGERAIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

CLOCK

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS

(P.193)

(P.165)

(P.190)

(P.255)

(P.161)/

(P.331)

(P.299)

(P.331)

(P.144)(P.208)

(P.82)

(P.143)

(P.225, 257)

(P.143)

(P.35)

(P.254)

(P.291)

(P.137)(P.138)(P.138, 141)

2

1

０６／０７／２６　１７：３９：５５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１４１　

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The length of the wipeinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

If you turn it to the shortest delay,the wipers will change to low speedoperation when the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you, andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.

You can customize some windshieldwiper settings. See page formore information.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

134

On Touring models

Windshield Wipers and Washers

INT

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

Windshield WasherInstrum

entsand

Controls

137

０６／０７／２６　１７：４０：０４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１４２　

－

－

To turn on the rear window wiper,rotate the switch clockwise to ON.It operates intermittently.

Turn signalOffParking and indicator lightsAUTO (Touring models only)Headlights onHigh beamsFlash high beamsFog lights off (Touring modelsonly)Fog lights on (Touring modelsonly)

Rotate the switchcounterclockwise to spray thewindow washer without activatingthe wiper.

OFF

Hold past ON to turn the windowwiper on and the window washeron.

When you shift the transmission tothe reverse position with the frontwindshield wipers activated, the rearwindow wiper operates automatically.

When the wiper control lever ispositioned as follows:

The rear window wiperoperates intermittently.

The rear window wiperoperates continuously.

7.8.

9.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

1.

2.

3.4.

Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal, Headlights

Turn Signal and HeadlightsRear Window Wiper and Washer

INT

LO or HI

138

０６／０７／２６　１７：４０：１５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１４３　

－－

－

CONTINUED

Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

The rotating switchon the left lever controls the lights.Turning this switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the parking lights,taillights, instrument panel lights,side-marker lights, and rear licenseplate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

If you leave the lights on with thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. This indicator stays on ifyou leave the light switch on andturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position.

To switch from lowbeams to high beams, push the leftlever forward until you hear a click.The high beam indicator will comeon (see page ). Pull it back toreturn to low beams. To flash thehigh beams, pull the lever backlightly, then release it. The highbeams will stay on as long as youhold the lever back.

72

Turn Signal Headlights

High Beams

Turn Signal, Headlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

139

０６／０７／２６　１７：４０：２２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１４４　

－ The automatic lightingfeature turns on the headlights, allother exterior lights, and theinstrument panel lights when itsenses low ambient light.

To turn on the automatic lighting,turn the light switch to AUTO at anytime. The lights will come onautomatically when the outside lightlevel becomes low (at dusk, forexample). The lights on indicatorcomes on as a reminder. The lightsand indicator turn off automaticallywhen the system senses highambient light.

The lights turn off automaticallywhen you turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position. To turn themon again, either turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, orturn the light switch to position.

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areassuch as long tunnels or parkingfacilities. The automatic lighting feature is

controlled by a sensor located on topof the dashboard. Do not cover thissensor or spill liquids on it.

On Touring modelsAUTO

Headlights

140

SENSOR

０６／０７／２６　１７：４０：２８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１４５　

＊

＊

＊

If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightsgo off. With the driver’s door open,you will hear a lights-on reminderchime.

The lights turn on again when youunlock or open the driver’s door.

On the Touring models, this time ischangeable. See page for how toselect and set the time.

This turns off the headlights,parking lights, taillights, side markerlights, license plate lights, andinstrument panel lights within 15seconds of removing the key fromthe ignition switch and closing thedriver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the or

position, remove the key, thenopen and close the driver’s door.If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights turn off after10 minutes.

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.They will go off when the headlightsare turned off.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights and the highbeam indicator come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

121

On EX, EX-L and Touring models onlyOn Touring modelsAutomatic Lighting Off FeatureFog Lights

Daytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)

Headlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

141

０６／０７／２６　１７：４０：３８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１４６　

The Select/Reset knob on theinstrument panel controls thebrightness of the instrument panellights. Turn the knob to adjust thebrightness.Separate adjustments can be madewhen the headlights are on and off.

You will hear a beep when maximumor minimum brightness is reached.You will also hear a beep when themaximum level is canceled byturning the knob a click to the left.

The level of brightness is shown onthe multi-information display(Touring models) or on theinformation display (LX, EX andEX-L models) while you adjust it. Itgoes out 5 seconds after you finishadjusting.

To reduce glare at night, the instru-ment panel illumination dims whenyou turn the light switch to or

. Turning the Select/Resetknob fully to the right until you heara beep will cancel the reduced bright-ness.

Instrument Panel Brightness

142

BRIGHTNESS LEVELSELECT/RESET KNOB

Touring model is shown

０６／０７／２６　１７：４０：４４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１４７　

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. It shuts off when youturn off the ignition. You have toturn the defogger on again when yourestart the vehicle.

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all outside turn signals andboth indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your vehicle is disabled.

Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

Instruments

andC

ontrols

143

LX model EX, EX-L and Touring models

０６／０７／２６　１７：４０：５２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１４８　

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel so itpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and indicators.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

144

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０６／０７／２６　１７：４０：５８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１４９　

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the doorlocks. You can keep the glove boxlocked when you leave your vehicleand the valet key at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks. The keys without a remote

transmitter do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Keys and Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

145

KEYNUMBERTAG

LX model

KEYNUMBERTAG

EX, EX-L and Touring models

MASTER KEYSWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

VALET KEY(Gray)

VALET KEY(Gray)

MASTERKEYS(Black)

０６／０７／２６　１７：４１：０６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１５０　

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourdealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go off. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

146

０６／０７／２６　１７：４１：１５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１５１　

－－

－

－

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key to the LOCK (0)position, the shift lever must be inPark, and you must push the key inslightly.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).89

On Touring models

START (III)LOCK (0)

ON (II)

ACCESSORY (I)

Ignition Switch

Instruments

andC

ontrols

147

０６／０７／２６　１７：４１：２３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１５２　

－－

－

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Press ittwice to unlock the other doors andthe tailgate. Some exterior lights willflash twice each time you press thebutton. If you do not open any dooror the tailgate within 30 seconds,they will automatically relock.

Press and hold thisbutton for about 1 second to attractattention; the horn will sound andthe exterior lights will flash for about30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,press any other button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Panicmode does not work when the key isin the ignition switch.

Refer to page for how to takecare of your remote transmitter.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior lights will flash once. Whenyou push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the security system hasset. You cannot lock the doors andthe tailgate if any door or the tailgateis not fully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the front and rear individualmap lights, depending on theirswitch positions, will come on (seepage ). If you do not open anydoor, the lights stay on for about 30seconds, then go out. If you relockthe doors and the tailgate with theremote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the lights willgo off immediately.

152208

On LX model UNLOCK PANIC

LOCK

Remote Transmitter Care

Remote Transmitter

148

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：４１：２９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１５３　

＋

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.

Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

3.

4.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

149

SCREW

BATTERY

TAB

０６／０７／２６　１７：４１：３９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１５４　

－

－－

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Press ittwice to unlock the other doors andthe tailgate. Some exterior lights willflash twice each time you press thebutton.

If you do not open any doors or thetailgate within 30 seconds, they willautomatically relock and the securitysystem sets.

If you press the LOCK button andthe PASSENGER’S SIDE SLIDINGDOOR button at the same time forabout 1 second, the LED in theremote transmitter will blink twice,and all doors and the tailgate willunlock simultaneously when youpress the UNLOCK button. Tocancel this feature, press the LOCKbutton and the PASSENGER’S SIDESLIDING DOOR button at the same

time. The LED will blink once.

On Touring models, you can changethis setting (see page ).

Press and hold thisbutton for about 1 second to attractattention; the horn will sound andthe exterior lights will flash for about30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,press any other button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Panicmode does not work when the key isin the ignition switch.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior lights will flash once. Whenyou push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the security system hasset. You cannot lock the doors andthe tailgate if any door or the tailgateis not fully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the front and rear individualmap lights, depending on theirswitch positions, will come on (seepage ). If you do not open anydoor, the lights stay on for about 30seconds, then go out. If you relockthe doors and the tailgate with theremote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the lights willgo off immediately.

132

208

On EX, EX-L and Touring models UNLOCK

PANICLOCK

Remote Transmitter

150

LEDLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：４１：４７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１５５　

If the power sliding door MAINswitch on the dashboard is in theOFF position, you cannot open orclose the sliding doors with theremote transmitter.

You can open or close the powertailgate with the remote transmitterwhen the doors are unlocked. Pressand hold the TAILGATE button toopen or close the power tailgate.When the tailgate begins to move,you will hear a beep, and some frontand rear lights will flash.

You can open or close each slidingdoor with the remote transmitterwhen the doors are unlocked. Pushand hold the right button to open orclose the passenger’s side door, andthe left button to open or close thedriver’s side door.

On Touring models only

Opening or Closing the PowerSliding Doors

Opening or Closing the PowerTailgate

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

151

DRIVER’SSIDE SLIDINGDOORBUTTON

POWER SLIDING DOORMAIN SWITCH

TAILGATEBUTTON

PASSENGER’SSIDESLIDINGDOORBUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：４１：５５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１５６　

Each remote transmitter activatesthe driver’s seat position memorysystem (see page ) andcustomized vehicle control settings(see page ). When you open thedriver’s door after unlocking it withthe remote transmitter, the driver’sseat moves to the positions stored inmemory. You will hear two beepswhen the movement is completed.

The driving position memoryactivation (Driver 1, Driver 2) isshown on the back of eachtransmitter. Make sure you storeyour seat position in the memorythat is activated by the transmitteryou normally carry.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

You can turn off this systemactivation with the remotetransmitter. Press and hold theLOCK and UNLOCK buttons at thesame time. The LED in the remotetransmitter will blink twice. Thenrelease the buttons, and press theLOCK or UNLOCK button.

To turn it back on, repeat thisprocedure. The LED will come onfor 1 second to indicate the featurehas been turned on.

185

101


Recalling a Memorized SeatPosition

Remote Transmitter Care

Remote Transmitter

152

With Driver 2With Driver 1

０６／０７／２６　１７：４２：０４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１５７　

＋

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.

Battery type: CR2025

To replace the battery, separate thehalfs by carefully prying on the edgewith a coin. Remove the old battery,and insert a new battery with theside facing up. Snap the two halvesof the transmitter case back together.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulations forbattery disposal.




Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

153

０６／０７／２６　１７：４２：１２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１５８　

To lock the doors and the tailgate,press the front of the master doorlock switch on either front door,press the lock tab on the driver’sdoor, or use the outside lock on thedriver’s door.

Pressing the rear of the master doorlock switch will unlock all doors andthe tailgate.

The lock tab on any door locks andunlocks that door.

All doors and the tailgate can belocked from the outside by using thekey in the driver’s door lock. Tounlock only the driver’s door, insertthe key, turn the key, and release it.The remaining doors and the tailgateunlock when you turn the key asecond time within a few seconds.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches are disabled. They arenot disabled if the driver’s door isclosed. Pushing the front of themaster door lock switch on the openpassenger’s door will lock all doorsand the tailgate.

Power Door Locks Lockout Prevention

Door Locks

154

MASTER DOORLOCK SWITCH

LockFront

Rear

０６／０７／２６　１７：４２：２０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１５９　

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has customizablesettings for the doors and thetailgate to automatically lock andunlock. Make all settings before youstart driving.

With the auto door locking andunlocking, the tailgate also locks andunlocks.

In addition to the normal locking functions, all doors and the tailgate can be set to lock automatically in twomodes (Park Lock mode and DriveLock mode). The default setting from the factory is all doors and the tailgatelock in Drive Lock mode. To program modes, refer to the following

instructions.

To change the ‘‘AUTO DOORLOCK’’ setting, see page .

To change the ‘‘AUTO DOORUNLOCK’’ setting, see page .

126

128

On LX, EX and EX-L models On LX, EX and EX-L models

On Touring models

Door Locks

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Lock ModesInstrum

entsand

Controls

155

０６／０７／２６　１７：４２：３３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１６０　

1.

Locks all doors and the tailgate whenthe shift lever is moved out of the Park

(P) position.

To program the Park Lock mode:

parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position, and apply the

door.’(II) position, and close the driver s

Door Locks

156

０６／０７／２６　１７：４２：４２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１６１　

Push and hold the brake pedal, and

Turn the ignition switch to the ON

door.

2.

3.

Locks all doors and the tailgate whenthe vehicle’s speed reaches about 9 mph(15 km/h).

To program the Drive Lock mode:

Continue holding the switch untilyou hear another click (after about5 seconds.

Push and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a click.

seconds, turn the ignition switchto the LOCK (0) position.

Push and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

Release the switch and, within 5 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, and move the shift lever to the P position.

5.

4.

6.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position, and apply the

move the shift lever out of Park (P).

parking brake.

(II) position, and close the drive ’r s

3.

4. Release the switch and, within 5

The driver’s door or all doors and the tailgate can be set to unlock automatically in two modes (ParkUnlock mode and Ignition Switch Unlock mode). The default setting from the factory is the driver’s door unlocks in Park Unlock mode. To program modes, refer to the following instructions.

CONTINUED


Door Locks

Auto Door Unlock ModesInstrum

entsand

Controls

157

０６／０７／２６　１７：４２：５４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１６２　

Turn the ignition switch to the ON

door.

2.

To turn off the Auto Door Lock modes:

seconds, turn the ignition switchto the LOCK (0) position.

master door lock switch on thedriver' s door until you hear aclick (after about 5 seconds).

3. Push and hold the front of the

4. Release the switch and, within 5

1. Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position, and apply theparking brake.

drive ’r s(II) position, and open the

Door Locks

158

０６／０７／２６　１７：４３：０７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１６３　

to the LOCK (0) position.

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors and the tailgate when the shift lever ismoved into the Park (P) position.

To program the Park Unlock mode: Push and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

(after about 5 seconds) toactivate driver’ s door unlock, or

activate all doors and tailgateunlock.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON2.

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors and the tailgate when the ignition switchis moved out of the ON (II) position.

To program the Ignition SwitchUnlock mode:

door.

Push and hold the brake pedal, and3.

• Until you hear another click

3.

(after about 10 seconds) to

5 seconds, turn the ignition switch

• Until you hear two more clicks

4. Release the switch and, within

1. Make sure the shift lever is in the

parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

Park (P) position, and apply the

(II) position, and close the driver’sdoor.

1.

(II) position, and close the driver’s

the Park (P) position, and apply the Make sure the shift lever is in

parking brake.

move the shift lever out of Park (P).

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

159

０６／０７／２６　１７：４３：１７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１６４　

Push and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

• Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate driver’ s door unlock, or

Release the switch and, within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position,and move the shift lever to P.

• Until you hear two more clicks(after about 10 seconds) toactivate all doors and the tailgate unlock.

4.

5.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

6.

Release the switch and, within 5 seconds, turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position.

and, after about 5 seconds, you will hear another click.

Push and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a click

To turn off the Auto Door UnlockModes:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON2.

door.

3.

4.

1. Make sure the shift lever is inthe Park (P) position, and apply

(II) position, and open the driver’s

the parking brake.

With the childproof door locks on,automatic operation with the insidedoor handle is disabled.

To open the tailgate, pull the handle,then lift up. To close the tailgate, usethe inner handle to pull it down, thenpress down on the back edge.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear sliding doors. Each door hasa lock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up and use the outside doorhandle. 60

On EX, EX-L and Touring modelsChildproof Door Locks Tailgate


Door Locks, Tailgate

160

０６／０７／２６　１７：４３：２４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１６５　

The tailgate can be opened andclosed with the remote transmitteror the switch on the dashboard whenboth front doors are unlocked.

The tailgate can also be closed bypressing the button on the tailgate. Ifyou press the button again while thetailgate is closing, you will hear threebeeps, and the tailgate will stopmoving, reverse direction, and stopat the fully opened position.

Press and hold the tailgate button onthe remote transmitter or thedashboard switch for about 1 secondto open or close the tailgate. Eachtime you press the button on theremote transmitter or the dashboardswitch, you will hear a beep, andsome front and rear lights will flash.

To open or close the tailgatemanually, see page .

If you push the same button orswitch again while the tailgate isopening or closing, you will hearthree beeps, and the tailgate will stopmoving, reverse direction, and stopat the fully opened or closed position.

163

CONTINUED


Power Tailgate

Tailgate

Instruments

andC

ontrols

161

TAILGATEBUTTON TAILGATE SWITCH

POWER TAILGATE SWITCH

０６／０７／２６　１７：４３：３２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１６６　

The power tailgate has an auto-reverse feature. If it meetsresistance while opening or closing,it will beep three times and reversedirection. However, the tailgate maynot reverse immediately. Alwaysmake sure passengers and objectsare clear of the tailgate beforeopening or closing it.

Also check that passengers,especially children, do not have theirhands on the edge of the tailgate oron the tailgate sill. The auto reversefeature stops working when thetailgate is about to latch so the motorcan pull the tailgate shut.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, goes dead, or the fuseis removed while the tailgate is fullyopen, the power tailgate needs to bereset. After connecting the batteryor installing the fuse, close thetailgate fully by hand.

The power tailgate may not open orclose under the these conditions:

When the tailgate or the roof iscovered with snow or ice.

Do not install any accessories on thetailgate. It may cause the tailgate notto function properly. If there is snowor ice on the tailgate, make sure toremove it before you operate thetailgate.

If you pull the tailgate release handlewhile the tailgate is opening orclosing, it will stop moving. You needto open or close it the rest of the waymanually.

The tailgate has sensors on bothsides. Be careful not to damage them.If the sensors are damaged, thepower tailgate does not functionproperly.

When the vehicle is swayed in astrong wind.

The vehicle is parked on a steephill.

Auto-Reverse

Tailgate

162

Closing a power tailgate whileanyone is in the path of thetailgate can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure everyone is clearbefore closing the powertailgate.

０６／０７／２６　１７：４３：４１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１６７　

CONTINUED

If you try to drive off with thetailgate not closed completely, abeeper sounds and a ‘‘DOOR &TAILGATE OPEN’’ message isshown on the multi-informationdisplay.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.

If there is a problem in the powertailgate system, you will see a‘‘CHECK POWER TAILGATE’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. Have the system checked byyour dealer.

With this message shown on themulti-information display, you canstill open or close the tailgatemanually.

Push the release lever to the right asshown.

If you need to unlock the tailgatemanually, it means there is aproblem with the tailgate. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

If the power door lock system cannotunlock the tailgate, unlock itmanually.

Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the cover on the back of thetailgate.

60

On Touring models

Unlocking the Tailgate


Tailgate

Instruments

andC

ontrols

163

LEVERCOVER

０６／０７／２６　１７：４３：５１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１６８　

To open, pull the inside or outsidedoor handle, and slide the door back.It will latch in the fully open position.When opening from the inside, thechildproof door lock must beunlocked.

To close, pull either handle, and slidethe door closed. Make sure the dooris closed and latched securely beforedriving, and all passengers are clearof the sliding doors before closingthem.

The doors are electrically poweredand can be operated with the remotetransmitter, the door handles, or thedashboard switches. To operate thedoors:

When opening a sliding door, it stopsabout halfway if the window is openmore than 3 in (8 cm). If the vehicleis facing downhill, the sliding doorwill slam shut when you release thedoor handle. Always close thewindow fully before opening thesliding door.

The shift lever must be in Park orneutral. To operate the doors withthe shift lever in neutral, theignition switch must be in the ON(II) position with the brake pedalpressed or the parking brakeapplied.

The MAIN switch must be in theON position.

The doors must be unlocked.

Use the key to unlock the tailgate asshown, then pull the outer handle toopen the tailgate.

If you need to unlock the tailgatemanually, it means there is aproblem with the tailgate. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.


On EX, EX-L and Touring modelsOn LX model

Power Sliding DoorsOpening and Closing ManualSliding Doors

Tailgate, Sliding Doors

164

Unlock

Lock

０６／０７／２６　１７：４４：００　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１６９　

CONTINUED

When the shift lever is in Park:

When the shift lever is in neutral andthe ignition switch is in the ON (II)position:

If you shift out of Park while a dooris closing, you will hear a beep untilthe door closes.

When you shift out of Park while adoor is opening, you will hear acontinuous tone and the door willstop moving if you release the brakepedal or the parking brake. Stop thevehicle and close the door.

To open the door with the insidedoor handle, pull the handlebackward. Push it forward to closethe door. If you pull backward orpush forward on the door handlewhile a door is opening or closing,the door stops moving. Pullbackward or push forward to open orclose the door fully.

To open or close the door with theoutside door handle, pull the doorhandle. If you pull the door handlewhile a door is opening or closing,the door stops moving. If you pull thedoor handle again, the door will openfully.

The dashboard switches to the leftof the steering column allow you toopen or close the power sliding doors.

The MAIN switch on the dashboardcontrols power to the sliding doors.

If you shift out of neutral or releasethe brake pedal or the parking brakewhile a door is opening, you will heara continuous tone and the door willstop moving. Stop the vehicle andclose the door.

If you shift out of neutral or releasethe brake pedal or the parking brakewhile a door is closing, you will heara beep until the door closes.

Sliding Doors

Door Handles Dashboard SwitchesInstrum

entsand

Controls

165

POWER SLIDINGDOOR SWITCHES

MAIN SWITCH

０６／０７／２６　１７：４４：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１７０　

To open a power sliding door, pushand release the bottom of theappropriate switch. If you forget tounlock the door, you will hear threebeeps. Unlock the door, and tryagain.

To open and close a power slidingdoor, press and hold the appropriatebutton for at least 1 second. If youforget to unlock the door, you willhear three beeps. Unlock the door,and try again.

Each power sliding door has an auto-reverse feature. If a door meetsresistance while closing, it will beepthree times and reverse direction.However, the door may not reverseimmediately and may cause somebruising or discomfort. Always makesure passengers and objects areclear of the doors before closingthem.

If a rear window is open more than3 in (8 cm), the power sliding door isdesigned to stop about halfway toavoid accidents. If this happens,close the door with the door handles,the dashboard switch, or the remotetransmitter. Close the window andopen the sliding door. Make sure thewindow is fully closed before youoperate the power sliding door.

To stop movement, push theappropriate door button; you willhear three beeps. Push and hold thesame button again for at least 1second and the door will reversedirection.

When the MAIN switch is in theOFF position, you have to operatethe doors manually.

To stop a door, push either the top orbottom of the switch. The door willstop and you will hear three beeps.Push the switch again to resumemovement.

To close a sliding door, push andrelease the top of the switch.

Sliding Doors

Remote Transmitter Auto-Reverse

166

DRIVER’SSIDESLIDINGDOORBUTTON

PASSENGER’SSIDESLIDINGDOORBUTTON

LED

０６／０７／２６　１７：４４：１９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１７１　

You can manually open or close thesliding doors. The MAIN switchmust be in the OFF position. Toopen a door, pull the inside oroutside door handle, and slide thedoor back. It will latch in the fullyopen position. To close, pull eitherhandle and slide the door forward.When the door is almost closed, theauto-closer will pull the door shut.

Before operating the sliding doors,check that passengers, especiallychildren, do not have their hands onthe edge of the sliding door or on thedoor pillar. The auto-reverse motorstops working when the door isabout to latch so the auto-closer canpull the door shut.

If there is an obstacle in the door sill,the power sliding door may not openor close properly. When removingthe obstacle from the door sill, makesure to turn off the main switch onthe dashboard.

When replacing a flat tire, make sureto turn off the power sliding doormain switch on the dashboard.

Do not allow anyone to step on thelower arm of the sliding door whilethe door is open. This could damagethe sliding door mechanism.

When you drive with children in yourvehicle, use the childproof doorlocks (see page ). This willprevent children from opening thedoors accidentally.

Do not put any item in the doorpocket that sticks out from thepocket. It can prevent the doors fromopening or closing properly, anddamage the vehicle body.

160

On all models

On EX, EX-L and Touring models

Sliding Doors

Manually Opening/Closing thePower Sliding Door

Important Sliding DoorPrecautions

Instruments

andC

ontrols

167

Closing a sliding door while anypart of a passenger is in thedoor’s path can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all passengers areclear of the doorway beforeclosing a sliding door.

０６／０７／２６　１７：４４：２８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１７２　

When you release the fuel fill door,the driver’s side sliding doorautomatically locks so it cannot openand interfere with the fuel door. If apassenger attempts to unlock thedoor by cycling the lock knob severaltimes, the door can be opened.

If a passenger needs to get out whileyou are refueling, instruct thatperson to exit on the passenger’sside.

When you close the fuel fill door, thedriver’s side sliding door unlocks if itwas unlocked when you opened thefuel fill door.

If you open the fuel fill door whilethe driver’s side sliding door isopening, the sliding door stops. Ifthis happens, the door must beoperated manually.

When parking facing downhill, makesure the doors are latched in thefully open position, and then hold thedoor open for your passengers. Donot pull the inside or outside doorhandle, or the door will slam shut.

Make sure the main switch on thedashboard is in the ON position.

When parking facing downhill on asteep grade, the power sliding doorsmay not open or close as they donormally.

If you leave the vehicle on a steepdownhill with a power sliding doorhalf open and the engine off, themagnetic lock will turn off after 30minutes and the sliding door willautomatically open or close. In thiscase you will hear a continuous tone.

If your vehicle is facing downhill, donot turn the main switch to OFFwhile the door is opening becausethe door may slam shut.



Sliding Doors

Refueling Parking on a Hill

168

０６／０７／２６　１７：４４：３７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１７３　

If the battery is disconnected or goesdead, close the sliding doorcompletely by hand. If it still doesnot operate properly after thebattery is reconnected, have yourvehicle checked by a dealer.

If there is a problem in the powersliding door system, you will see a‘‘CHECK LEFT SLIDING DOOR’’ or‘‘CHECK RIGHT SLIDING DOOR’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ). If thismessage stays on, turn the MAINswitch to OFF, and have the systeminspected by your dealer.

If the power sliding door indicatorcomes on and stays on, there is aproblem in the system. Turn theMAIN switch to OFF, and have thesystem inspected by a dealer.

Each sliding door has a pinch sensoron the front edge. Do not damagethis sensor, or the power sliding doormay not operate properly.

89

On EX, EX-L and Touring models On EX and EX-L models

On Touring models

Sliding Doors

Pinch Sensor Power Sliding Door IndicatorInstrum

entsand

Controls

169

PINCH SENSOR POWER SLIDING DOOR INDICATOR

U.S. model is shown

０６／０７／２６　１７：４４：４５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１７４　

There are bucket seats witharmrests for two front passengers,bucket seats with armrests for twopassengers in the second row, and abench seat for three passengers inthe third row.

For greater cargo capacity, the seatsin the second row can be removed,and the bench seat in the third rowcan be folded into the floor.

The EX and EX-L models have astowable second row plus-one seatthat can be installed between thesecond row bucket seats whenneeded. The plus-one seat can alsobe used as a second row centerconsole, or stored in the floorstorage area. For more information,see page .179

Passenger SeatingConvertible Second Row BucketSeats

Seats

170

０６／０７／２６　１７：４４：５１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１７５　

－

CONTINUED

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

1312

The EX, EX-L and Touring modelshave a power adjustable driver’s seat.The LX model has manual driver’sseat adjustments.

The front passenger’s seat, and theseats in the second and third rowsadjust manually.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

To adjust the bucket seats in thesecond row, pull up the bar on thefront of the seat bottom.

The third row seats do not adjustforward and backward.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

To change the seat-back angle of thebucket seats in the second row, pullforward on the lever on the outsideof the seat-back.

Seats

Seat AdjustmentsInstrum

entsand

Controls

171

０６／０７／２６　１７：４５：０１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１７６　

－

The left and right halves of the thirdseat-back can be adjusted separately.To adjust the angle, pull theadjustment strap on the outside ofeach seat-back, move the seat-backto the desired position, and releasethe adjustment strap. Let the seat-back latch in the new position.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. Pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion to raisethe seat bottom or push the leverdown to lower the seat cushion.

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

The controls for the adjustabledriver’s power seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the power seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

On LX model

On EX, EX-L and Touring models12 13

Seats

Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

Power Seat Adjustments

172

ADJUSTMENT STRAPS

０６／０７／２６　１７：４５：０８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１７７　

Moves the seatforward andbackward.

Moves the front ofthe seat up or down.

Moves the wholeseat up and forward,or down andbackward. The frontof the seat also tiltsup or down at thesame time.

Raises or lowers theseat.

Adjusts the seat-back angle forwardor backward. To change the lumbar support, move

the lever on the right side of theseat-back forward or backward.Keep moving the lever forward orbackward until you find a suitableposition.


Seats

Driver’s Lumbar SupportInstrum

entsand

Controls

173

０６／０７／２６　１７：４５：１７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１７８　

An armrest is located on each of thefront seats and on each side of thesecond row seats. Pivot it down touse it. When you remove the bucketseats in the second row, pivot thearmrests up out of the way.

The angle of the armrest on eachfront seat is adjustable. Pivot thearmrest down, and pull it up to thedesired angle.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

All head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.


14

Seats

Armrests Head Restraints

174

RELEASEBUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：４５：２６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１７９　

To get into or out of the third rowseat, walk between the second rowseats.

When the seat on the passenger’sside is moved to the center, walkthrough the passenger’s side to getinto or out of the third row seat.

You need to remove the stowableplus-one seat (see page ) or thesecond row console (see page )before you can make this seatarrangement.

To get into or out of the third rowseat, pull up the release lever on theshoulder of each second row bucketseat. The seat-back will tilt forwardand the whole seat will slide forward.

179200

Seats

Third Seat AccessInstrum

entsand

Controls

175

RELEASE LEVER

０６／０７／２６　１７：４５：３３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１８０　

The second row bucket seat on thepassenger’s side can be moved to thecenter to provide access to the thirdrow seat.

Remove the cover from under thepassenger’s side bucket seat.

If you have already set the floormat under the passenger’s sidebucket seat, make sure youremove it before moving thebucket seat.

Unlock the seat from the floor bypulling the lock release leverunder the seat cushion’s frontedge and lifting the rear of theseat.

Slide the seat toward the center ofthe vehicle.Push the back of the seat downover the floor hooks. Make surethe seat is securely locked in place.

1. 2.

3.

Seats

Moving the Second Row BucketSeat

176

LOCKRELEASELEVER

COVER

０６／０７／２６　１７：４５：４０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１８１　

When the plus-one seat or secondrow console is in the center position,store the floor mat under thepassenger’s side bucket seat asshown above.

When the passenger’s side bucketseat is in the outside position, andthe plus-one seat or the second rowconsole is not used, install the floormat and the cover over the flooranchors.

To move the bucket seat back to theoutside, follow step 1 through 3 aspreviously described.

Make sure the seats are securelylocked in place before driving. A seatthat is not locked in place could flyaround and cause injury in a suddenstop or crash.

CONTINUED

Seats

Seats and Floor MatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

177

０６／０７／２６　１７：４５：４６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１８２　

Both seats can be removed to givemore cargo capacity.

To install the floor mat in an outerposition or the center position, insertthe tabs into the slits on the floor,then snap the two buttons in place.Refer to the illustrations above.

Do not remove the seats whiledriving.

To remove a second row seat:Pull up the seat-back angleadjustment lever, and fold theseat-back forward.

1.

Removing the Bucket Seats in theSecond Row

Seats

178

LOCK RELEASE LEVER

SLITS

Outer position

SLIT

Center positionSEAT-BACK LEVER

TABS

TAB TABS

BUTTONS BUTTONS

TAB

０６／０７／２６　１７：４５：５５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１８３　

To reinstall the seat, hook the frontof the seat to the floor, then push therear of the seat-back until it locks inplace. Make sure the seat is securelylatched before driving.

Unlock the seat from the floor bypulling the lock release leverunder the seat cushion’s frontedge and lifting the rear of theseat.

Unhook the front of the seat fromthe floor by pulling it back slightly,then pivoting it upward.

Your vehicle has a stowable plus-oneseat for the second row centerposition.

You can remove the plus-one seatwhen it is not use. Do not removethe seat while driving.

2.

3.

CONTINUED


Removing the Stowable SecondRow Plus-One Seat

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

179

０６／０７／２６　１７：４６：０２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１８４　

To remove the plus-one seat: Unlock the seat from the floor bypulling the lock release lever andlifting the rear of the seat.

Unhook the front of the seat fromthe floor by pulling it back slightly,then pivoting it upward.

Lower the head restraints fully.

Remove the seat cushion bypulling the seat cushion strap.

Fold the seat-back forward bypulling the seat-back strap.

Fold the legs by pulling the legfolding lever.1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Seats

180

SEAT CUSHION STRAP

SEAT-BACK STRAP LOCK RELEASE LEVERLEG FOLDINGLEVER

０６／０７／２６　１７：４６：１１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１８５　

The stowable plus-one seat assemblycan be stored in the floor storagearea between the front seats and thesecond row seats.

To install the stowable plus-one seat,extend the legs by pulling the legfolding lever.

Hook the front of the seat to thefloor, then push down the back untilit locks. Make sure both the frontand back of the seat are securelylatched. Pull up the seat-back, andadjust the seat-back angle to thedesired position while pulling theseat-back strap on the outside of theseat bottom.

CONTINUED

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

181

SEAT-BACK STRAP

LEG FOLDINGLEVER

STOWABLE SECOND ROWPLUS-ONE SEAT

０６／０７／２６　１７：４６：１８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１８６　

Install the seat cushion on the seatbottom plate. To install the cushion,hook the front of the cushion first,then push down the rear until thecushion is securely positioned.

To use the plus-one seat as a centerconsole, remove its seat cushion bypulling up the seat cushion strap.Then pivot the seat-back forwarduntil it is flat. Store the seat cushionin the floor storage area.

Make sure the seats are securelylocked in place before driving. A seatthat is not locked in place could flyaround and cause injury in a suddenstop or crash.

To create more cargo space, you canfold the one-motion third row ‘‘MagicSeat’’ into the floor recess.

Unlatch the center seat detachableseat belt anchor, and let the beltretract all the way into the ceiling.Place the latch plate and anchorlatch into their holding slots. Makesure both seat belts on the outerseats are out of the way.

Lower the head restraints fully.Pull the handle on each seat-backto unlock the front legs of thethird seat.

Pivot the seat into the cargo areafloor recess.

Make sure all items in the cargoarea are secured. Loose items canfly forward and cause injury if youhave to brake hard. See

on page .

3.

4.

1.

2.

314

Seats

Folding the One-Motion ThirdRow ‘‘Magic Seat’’

CarryingCargo

182

HANDLES

０６／０７／２６　１７：４６：２７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１８７　

To return the seat to the uprightposition:

Pull the seat-back upright with thestrap. Make sure the seat issecurely locked into positionbefore driving.Pull the seat out of the recess by

pulling on the handle. Pivot theseat forward all the way. The frontlegs of the third seat willautomatically latch.

1.

2.

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

183

STRAPS

０６／０７／２６　１７：４６：３３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１８８　

Follow these precautions when usingthe seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seatonly has heaters in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag system.The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use them. Theseat heater switches are located onthe dashboard above the centerpocket. Push the top of the switch,HI, to rapidly heat up the seat.After the seat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe bottom of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops.

In LO, the heater does not cycle withtemperature change.


Seat Heaters

184

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

０６／０７／２６　１７：４６：４０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１８９　

Your vehicle has a memory featurefor the driver’s seat position. Store a driver’s seat position only

when the vehicle is parked.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. You cannot add anew seat position in memoryunless the ignition switch is in theON (II) position. You can recall amemorized position with theignition switch in any position.

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ).

Two seat positions can be stored inseparate memories. You select amemorized position by pushing theappropriate button or appropriateremote transmitter (Driver 1 orDriver 2).

Press and release the MEMObutton on the driver’s door. Youwill hear a beep. Then, bothindicators in the memory buttonswill start to blink. Press and holdone of the memory buttons (1 or2) within 5 seconds after you pressthe MEMO button. When thesystem completes storing a newdriving position, you hear twobeeps. The indicator in the storedmemory button will come on.

This setting can be linked orunlinked with the remote transmitter.For more information, see page .

You can change the ‘‘MEMORYPOSITION LINK’’ setting in themulti-information display (see page

).

1.

2. 3.173

119

154

CONTINUED

On Touring model only Storing a Driving Position inMemory

Driving Position Memory System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

185

MEMO BUTTON

MEMORYBUTTONS

INDICATORS

０６／０７／２６　１７：４６：４９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１９０　

Doing any of the following afterpressing the MEMO button willcancel the storing procedure.

Not pressing a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

To select a memorized position, dothis:

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

The system will move the driver’sseat to the memorized position. Theindicator in the selected memorybutton will flash during movement.When the adjustment is complete,you will hear two beeps, and theindicator will stay on.

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change theseat position after it is in itsmemorized position. If you changethe memorized position, theindicator in the memory button willgo out. To keep this seat position forlater use, you must store it in thedriver’s seat position memory.

Shift out of Park.

Pressing the MEMO button againwithin 5 seconds.

Readjusting the seat position.

Each memory button stores only oneseat position. Storing a new positionerases the previous position stored inthat button’s memory. If you want toadd a new position while retainingthe current one, use the othermemory button.

All stored driving positions will belost if your vehicle’s battery goesdead or is disconnected.

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep.

Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat.

Press any button on the driver’sdoor: MEMO, memory button 1 or2.

To stop the system’s automaticadjustment, do any of these actions:

1.

2.

Selecting a Memorized Position

Driving Position Memory System

186

MEMORY BUTTONS

０６／０７／２６　１７：４７：００　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１９１　

－

－

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

To open/close the driver’swindow, push the window switchfirmly down or up to the seconddetent, and release it. The windowwill automatically go up or down allthe way. To stop the window, pull/push on the window switch briefly.

If the MAIN switch is OFF, thepassenger windows cannot be raisedor lowered. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open the window, pushthe switch down to the first detentand hold it. Release the switch whenyou want the window to stop. Pullback on the switch and hold it toclose the window.

CONTINUED

AUTO

AUTO REVERSE

Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

187

MAIN SWITCHDRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０６／０７／２６　１７：４７：０８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１９２　

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s doors unlock, and allfour windows start to open. Tostop the windows, release thebutton.

To open the windows further,press the button again and hold it.If the windows stop before thedesired position, repeat steps 1and 2.

You cannot close the windows withthe remote transmitter.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

You can open all of the windowsfrom the outside with the remotetransmitter.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function may be disabled. Ifthe AUTO function is disabled, thepower window system will need to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor about 2 seconds.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.


Opening the Windows with theRemote Transmitter

Power Windows

188

UNLOCKBUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：４７：１７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１９３　

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows start toopen. To stop the windows,release the key.

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows start to close. To stop thewindows, release the key.

If the windows stop before thedesired position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

To open:

You can open and close the windowswith the key in the driver’s door lock.

To open the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

To close the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Opening/Closing the Windowswith the Key

Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

189

Open

Close

０６／０７／２６　１７：４７：２８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１９４　

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the top of the switch( ). To open the moonroof,press and hold the bottom of theswitch ( ).

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. The key-offdelay cancels as soon as you openeither front door. You must thenturn the ignition to the ON (II)position for the moonroof to operate.

The moonroof can be tilted up in theback for ventilation, or it can be slidback into the roof. Use the switchunder the left dashboard vent tooperate the moonroof. You mustturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position for the moonroof tooperate.


Moonroof

190

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

０６／０７／２６　１７：４７：３６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１９５　

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this sensing.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

1.

2.

CONTINUED


On Touring models

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power MirrorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

191

SELECTOR SWITCH

０６／０７／２６　１７：４７：４５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１９６　

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

To apply the parking brake, push thepedal down with your foot. Torelease it, push on the pedal again.The parking brake indicator on theinstrument panel should go out whenthe parking brake is fully released(see page ).

3.

69


Parking Brake

Mirrors, Parking Brake

Heated Mirrors

192

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

０６／０７／２６　１７：４７：５３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１９７　

You can adjust the position of thebrake pedal and accelerator pedalwhen the shift lever is in the Parkposition. Push the top of theadjustment switch to move thepedals forward, and the bottom tomove them backward.

To adjust the pedals:

Push and hold the top of theadjustment switch until pedals areclosest to you.

Adjust your seat and the steeringwheel so you can operate thecontrols and steering wheel easily.

Push and hold the bottom of theadjustment switch until pedals arein the position you can press themfully and comfortably.

Do not adjust the pedals with yourfoot on or under either pedal.

You will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

1.

2.

3.

89

On Touring models


Parking Brake, Adjustable Driver’s Foot Pedals

Adjustable Driver’s Foot PedalsInstrum

entsand

Controls

193


Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will soundif the vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

０６／０７／２６　１７：４８：０１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１９８　

＊＊

＊

＊

Interior Convenience Items

194

BEVERAGE HOLDER

VANITYMIRROR

CENTERPOCKET

ACCESSORYPOWERSOCKET

REARCOMPARTMENT

COAT HOOK SUN VISOR

: Touring model only

LOWERGLOVE BOX

UPPER GLOVEBOX

REMOVABLE SECONDROW CONSOLE

RETRACTABLECENTER TRAY

BEVERAGEHOLDER

SUNGLASSESHOLDER

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKETS

AC POWEROUTLET

BEVERAGEHOLDERS

IN-FLOOR STORAGE(with LAZY SUSAN )

０６／０７／２６　１７：４８：０６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０１９９　

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

To use the retractable center tray,pull up the outside edge of the trayuntil it latches. To store it, pull thelever and lower the tray.

Sitting on or getting under the tray,or putting heavy objects on the tray,may damage or deform it.

Do not keep items on the tray whiledriving. They may fall down or flyaround when you go around cornersor brake hard.

CONTINUED

Beverage HoldersRetractable Center Tray


Instruments

andC

ontrols

195

０６／０７／２６　１７：４８：１３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２００　

To protect the beverage holder, thebottom tray is designed to breakaway if you try to place a heavyobject on it. If this happens, hold theedge of the bottom tray and pull it upuntil you feel a detent.

Be careful not to damage an openbeverage holder when you get intoor out of the vehicle.

The beverage holders for the thirdseat passengers are in the armrestson the rear side panels.Each second row seat has a

beverage holder on the outside ofthe seat cushion. To use thebeverage holder, push on the tab.The beverage holder will swing open.To close, pivot it up and push it inuntil it latches.

To use the front beverage holder,pull the handle.

Additional beverage holders for thefront seat passengers are in theretractable center tray.


196

TAB

０６／０７／２６　１７：４８：１９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２０１　

The removable second row consolehas a beverage holder on the front.

To use the beverage holder, push onthe front lid. The lid will swing open.To close, lower the lid, and push itdown until it latches.

Each rear sliding door has anintegrated sunshade. To use asunshade, hold the tab on the topand pull the sunshade all the way up.Insert the holes on the sunshade intothe hooks on the window frame. Tostore the shade, unhook it, and let itretract all the way down.

The sunshades are intended for useonly when the windows are fullyclosed. If a window is opened, theshade can be blown off its hooks. Asthe shade automatically retracts, itcould hit and hurt anyone sitting tooclose to the window.

On EX, EX-L and Touring modelsOn Touring models

Integrated Sunshades


Instruments

andC

ontrols

197

HOOK

TAB

０６／０７／２６　１７：４８：２６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２０２　

The sunglasses holder uses a convexmirror for its bottom panel. You cansee all the vehicle passengers in thismirror. To use the mirror, open thesunglasses holder fully, push it to thefirst detent, and release it.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the raised detent. It will unlatchand swing down. To close it, push ituntil it latches. Make sure the holderis closed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving. To switch back to the sunglasses

holder, close the conversation mirrorand then open the sunglasses holder.


Sunglasses Holder Conversation Mirror


198

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

Push

０６／０７／２６　１７：４８：３４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２０３　

To open the compartment, pull thelever and lift the lid. To close, lowerthe lid and push it down until itlatches.

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

Pull up the vanity mirror cover to usethe mirror. The lights come on whenyou open the cover. Make sure youclose the cover when you are notusing the vanity mirror.

The vanity mirror light will not comeon if the sun visor is slid outward.

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror Rear Compartment


Instruments

andC

ontrols

199

REAR COMPARTMENT LEVERSUN VISOR

０６／０７／２６　１７：４８：４２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２０４　

There is a removable consolebetween the second row bucketseats.

To remove the console, pull up thetab at the front edge to unlock therear of the console from the floor.

To reinstall the console, hook thefront of it to the floor, then pushdown the back until it locks. Makesure the console is securely locked inplace. A console that is not locked inplace could fly around and causeinjury in a sudden stop or crash.

If you remove the second seat centerconsole, store it in a safe placeoutside the vehicle.

Unhook the front of the consolefrom the floor by pulling it backslightly, then pivoting it upward.

To open the console, push the tab,and slide the lid to the rear.


Removable Second Row Console


200

TABTAB

０６／０７／２６　１７：４８：５０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２０５　

There is a large storage area underthe floor between the front seats andthe second row bucket seats.

To place or remove large items fromthe storage area, pull off the carpetnear the second seat, and pull thehandle to open the large lid.

To place or remove small items fromthe storage area, pull off the carpetin the center of the lid, and pull thehandle to open the small lid.

To keep the lid open, attach the hookto the grab rail on the back of thefront seat-back.

You can adjust the length of thehook strap. Pull down the upperedge of the stopper, and slide it up ordown.

CONTINUED

In-Floor Storage Area


Instruments

andC

ontrols

201

HANDLE

HOOK

LID HANDLE

０６／０７／２６　１７：４８：５８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２０６　

On Touring models

master key.This handle can be locked with the

You can store items in the floorstorage area up to 22 lbs (10 kg). Donot exceed this weight limit, or youmay damage the floor storage area.

The inside of the storage area canget very hot. Do not store any itemsthat should be kept cool, or itemsthat can be easily damaged, warped,or deformed by heat.

Dust, sand, etc., can accumulate inthe floor storage area. If you spillliquid on the floor around the floorstorage area, it can get inside thestorage area, and the moisture canbe trapped inside. Always keep theinside of the storage area dry andclean.

To prevent items from being thrownabout the vehicle and possiblyhurting someone in an accident orsudden stop, be sure the storagearea lids are securely closed beforedriving away.

To lock the small lid, open the largelid, and turn the lock knob clockwise.


202

０６／０７／２６　１７：４９：０４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２０７　

The Lazy Susan can be damaged if itis kept in a humid place. Alwaysstore the Lazy Susan in a dry placewhen it is removed.

The floor storage area has a LazySusan inside which makes it easier tofind items through the small lid.

To remove the Lazy Susan, open thelarge lid. Attach the hook to the grabrail on the back of the front seat tokeep the lid open. Hold the twohandles on the edge of the LazySusan, and pull it out of the storagearea. Store the removed Lazy Susanin a safe place outside the vehicle.Do not place it on the vehicle floor orseat, or in the cargo area. It can flyaround the interior in a crash.

The Lazy Susan can be removed togive you more cargo space.

On Touring models


Lazy SusanInstrum

entsand

Controls

203

LAZY SUSANHANDLE

０６／０７／２６　１７：４９：１１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２０８　

Open the lower glove box by pullingthe bottom of the handle. Close itwith a firm push. Lock or unlock theglove box with the master key.

Open the upper glove box bypressing the button. The lid willswing open. Close it with a firm push.

Keep the glove boxes closed whiledriving. If either are open, apassenger could be injured during acrash or sudden stop.


Glove Boxes

204

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxesclosed while driving.

０６／０７／２６　１７：４９：１７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２０９　

Open the center pocket by pullingthe handle. Close it with a firm push.

A coin holder is located in front ofthe beverage holder. To use the coinholder, pull the handle, then pushthe button. The lid will swing open.To close the lid, push it down until itlatches.

Make sure to close the lid before youclose the beverage holder.

Center Pocket Coin Pocket


Instruments

andC

ontrols

205

Without rear entertainment system With rear entertainment system

０６／０７／２６　１７：４９：２４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２１０　

There are three accessory powersockets in your vehicle. Twoaccessory power sockets are abovethe center pocket for the front seatpassengers, and another is on thecargo area sidewall on the driver’sside.

Each socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

There is a 115 volt AC power outletin the rear compartment on thedriver’s side. To use the AC poweroutlet, open the rear compartmentlid and open the outlet cover. Insertthe plug into the receptacle slightly,turn it 90° clockwise, then push inthe plug all the way.

Always run the engine when you usethe AC power outlet.

On Touring modelsAccessory Power Sockets AC Power Outlet


206

０６／０７／２６　１７：４９：３１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２１１　

The maximum capacity for thispower outlet is 115 volt AC at 100watts or less. If you use an appliancewhich requires more than 100 watts,it automatically stops supplying thepower. If this happens, turn theignition switch off and turn it onagain.

The AC power outlet is notdesigned for electric applianceswhich require high initial peakwattage such as cathode-ray tubetype televisions, refrigerators,electric pumps, etc. It is also notsuitable for devices that processprecise data such as medicalequipment or measuring instruments.Any appliances that require anextremely stable power supply suchas microcomputer-controlled electricblankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,should not be connected to thisoutlet.


Instruments

andC

ontrols

207

NOTE:

０６／０７／２６　１７：４９：３４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２１２　

The light control switch controls theinterior lights: the individual maplights in the front, the individual maplights above the second and thirdrow passengers. This switch hasthree positions: OFF, door activated,and ON.

The individual map lights in thefront can be turned on and off bypressing the lenses.

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows cannot beturned on.

None of the lights come on when adoor is opened. The individual map lights in the

front come on when any door isopened. When the doors areclosed, each light can be turned onand off by pressing the lenses.

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows come onwhen any door is opened. Whenthe doors are closed, each lightcan be turned on and off bypushing on the lens.

When the switch is in the OFF position: When the switch is in the door activatedposition:

Interior Lights

Light Control Switch

208

LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION

０６／０７／２６　１７：４９：４２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２１３　

CONTINUED

Turn on the front and rear individualmap lights by pushing the lens ofeach light. Push the lens again toturn it off. You can also operatethese lights with the light controlswitch (see page ).

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight(s) dims slightly, then fades outin about 30 seconds.

With the light control switch in thedoor activated position, all theindividual map lights come on whenyou unlock the door with the remotetransmitter (see page ).

With any door left open, the lightsstay on about 3 minutes, then go out.

You can change the ‘‘INTERIORLIGHT DIMMING TIME’’ setting inthe multi-information display (seepage ).

All the individual map lights comeon and stay on as long as theswitch remains in the ON position.

On Touring models

150

208

121

When the switch is in the ON position:

Interior Lights

Individual Map LightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

209

Front

０６／０７／２６　１７：４９：５１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２１４　

The ignition switch light comes onwhen you open the driver’s door, andstays on several seconds after youclose the door.

The cargo area light has a three-position switch. In the OFF position,the light does not come on. In thecenter position, it comes on whenyou open the tailgate. In the ONposition, it stays on continuously.

Ignition Switch LightCargo Area Light

Interior Lights

210

OFFON

Rear

０６／０７／２６　１７：４９：５６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２１５　

The courtesy lights in the frontdoors come on when you open anydoor.

The courtesy light between the maplights comes on when you turn theparking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the Select/Resetknob on the instrument panel.

Courtesy Lights

Interior Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

211

０６／０７／２６　１７：５０：０２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２１６　

212

０６／０７／２６　１７：５０：０４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２１７　

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them. (If you have an optionalaudio system, refer to the operatinginstructions that came with it.)

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps todiscourage vandalism and theft ofyour vehicle.

The climate control system and theaudio system have a voice controlfeature. Refer to the navigationsystem manual for more information.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 214Using Automatic Climate

...................................Control . 219.........Using the Rear A/C Unit . 220

...................Rear Climate Control . 223..............Climate Control Sensors . 224

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 225............AM/FM Radio Reception . 231

...Playing the XM Satellite Radio . 233..........Playing a CD, CD Changer . 239

................Protecting Your CDs . 248.CD Changer Error Messages . 249

...............................Playing a Tape . 250..........................Setting the Clock . 254

................Remote Audio Controls . 255.................Radio Theft Protection . 256

........Rear Entertainment System . 257..........................Playable DVDs . 285

..DVD Player Error Messages . 286............................Security System . 290

...............................Cruise Control . 291HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 294................Parking Sensor System . 299

.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 303

On vehicles with navigation system

Features

Features

213

０６／０７／２６　１７：５０：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２１８　

Vents, Heating, and A/C

214

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

FAN CONTROLBUTTON

MODECONTROLDIAL

AUTOBUTTON

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

REARCONTROLLERDIAL

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTER BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

REARBUTTON

REAR LOCKBUTTON

FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

OFF BUTTONDRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROLSWITCH

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

LX model

EX, EX-L and Touring models

MODEBUTTON

REAR TEMPERATURE (Touring model)/FAN SPEED(EX and EX-L models) CONTROL SWITCH

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) BUTTON

SYNC BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING (A/C)BUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：５０：１６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２１９　

▲

▼

▲

▼

Turn the dial clockwise to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Turn thedial counterclockwise to decrease it.

Press the button to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Press the

button to decrease it.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

Your vehicle has four temperaturecontrol buttons, two for the driver,and two for the front passenger.

When the rear passenger’s zone isturned on using the REAR button onthe front control panel, the rearpassenger compartment temperature

is selected based on the driver’stemperature setting.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit or its upper limit, it will bedisplayed as ‘‘Lo’’ or ‘‘Hi’’.

When you press this button, theindicator in the button comes on, andthe passenger’s side temperature(and the temperature of the rearpassenger compartment on theTouring model) is synchronized tothe driver’s side set temperature.

Changing the passenger’s sidetemperature (or the temperature ofthe rear passenger compartment onthe Touring model) makes theindicator to go off, and takes thesystem out of SYNC mode.

The rear passenger compartmenttemperature can also be setseparately. Press the top ( ) of theappropriate temperature controlbutton to increase the temperatureof airflow. Press the bottom ( ) ofthe button to decrease it. Each settemperature is shown in the display.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. On LXmodel, the indicator in the button ison when the A/C is on. On EX, EX-L,and Touring models, you will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

CONTINUED



On LX model

On LX model


On Touring models



Fan Control

Temperature Control

Recirculation Button

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

SYNC Button

Features

215

０６／０７／２６　１７：５０：２９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２２０　

When you switch to from, the A/C stays on, and you

can turn it on and off manually.

When you switch to another mode,the A/C returns to its original setting,either on or off, as displayed by theA/C indicator.

When you want to change thetemperature of the rear passengercompartment, press the REARbutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on, and you can change thetemperature using the reartemperature control button. Whenyou press the REAR LOCK button,the indicator in the button comes on,the rear A/C passenger controlpanel is disabled, and you cannotchange any settings from it.See page for how to operate therear passenger control panel.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches torecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard. In this mode, you cannotturn off the A/C and also cannotswitch to fresh air mode.

The passenger’s temperature cannotbe set separately from the driver’s.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the floorvents. When you select , thesystem automatically switch to FreshAir mode.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and defroster vents atthe base of the windshield.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).

Use the mode control dial or buttonto select the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

223

143

On LX model only



REAR/REAR LOCK Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control

216

０６／０７／２６　１７：５０：４７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２２１　

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red mark,turn off the A/C until the gaugereads normally.

Press the A/C button. Theindicator in the button comes on(LX model) or ‘‘A/C ON’’ is shownin the display (EX, EX-L andTouring models) when a fan speedis selected.

Make sure the temperature is setto the lower limit.

Select .

If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.

Set the fan to the desired speed.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear sidepanels.

Set the temperature control dial orbutton to the lower limit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial orbuttons.

You can change the fan speed of therear system from the front controlpanel. Press the REAR button, theindicator in the button comes on.Push the rear fan control button upor down to increase or decrease therear fan speed. When you press theREAR LOCK button, the indicator inthe button comes on, and the rearpassenger control panel is disabled.

See page for how to operate therear passenger control panel.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.2.3.

1.

2.3.4.

222

77

CONTINUED



Using the A/CVentilation

Using the Heater

Features

217

０６／０７／２６　１７：５１：０１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２２２　

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C turns off. Butif it was on to start with, it stays on.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel next to each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Set the fan to high.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to the freshair mode and turns on the A/C.

The indicator in the A/C buttonwill not come on (LX model), orthe A/C ON indicator will notcome on (EX, EX-L, and Touringmodels), if the A/C was off tostart with.

Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.

Select to help clear therear window.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.

The indicator in the A/C buttonwill not come on (LX model), orthe A/C ON indicator will notcome on (EX, EX-L, and Touringmodels), if the A/C was off tostart with.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theair conditioning, and setting the fanto maximum speed in fresh air mode.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Switch the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

1.2.3.4.

1.

1.

2.

3.

4.

2.3.

If the interior is very warm,


To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Dehumidify the Interior

218

０６／０７／２６　１７：５１：１２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２２３　

If you set the temperature to itslower or its upper limit, the systemruns at full cooling or heating only. Itdoes not regulate the interiortemperature.

Press the Auto button. Theindicator in the button comes on.

Set the desired temperature withthe temperature control button.You will see AUTO in the system’sdisplay. You can set the driver’sside temperature and passenger’sside temperature (and thetemperature of the rear passengercompartment on the Touringmodel) separately. The systemautomatically selects the propermix of conditioned and/or heatedair that will, as quickly as possible,raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

When you press a fan control button,the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

Press the OFF button and the REARbutton (indicator is off).

Turn the fan speed and temperaturecontrol dials all the way to the left,and turn the rear controller dial toOFF position.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interiortemperature is independentlyregulated for the driver andpassenger. If the driver’s side of thevehicle is getting too much sun, thesystem will adjust to a lowertemperature.

In AUTO mode, the rear passengercompartment temperature is alsoregulated independently.

1.

2.


On LX model


On EX-L and Touring models withnavigation system

On Touring models with navigationsystem


Using Automatic Climate Control

To Turn Everything Off

Semi-automatic OperationF

eatures

219

０６／０７／２６　１７：５１：２２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２２４　

－

－

You can adjust the airflow andtemperature of the rear A/C unitwith the REAR button and the reartemperature/fan speed controlswitch on the front control panel.

The rear passengers can also adjustthe fan speed, temperature, andairflow of the rear A/C unit with therear control panel.

With the dial in this position,no air flows to the rear vents. Therear control panel cannot be used bya second row passenger to adjust therear A/C. Turning the dial clockwisechanges the fan speed to the rearpassengers.

With the dial in this position,the rear control panel can be used bya second row passenger to adjust therear fan speed, airflow, andtemperature.

The climate control system for yourvehicle can also be operated by voicecontrol. See the navigation section inyour quick start guide for anoverview of this system, and thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

You can adjust the airflow of the rearA/C unit with the rear controller dialon the front control panel. The rearpassengers can also adjust thedirection and the amount of airflowon the rear control panel.

(On front control panel)

On models with navigation systemOn EX, EX-L, and Touring models

On LX model

On LX model


Voice Control System

OFF

Rear Controller DialON

Using the Rear A/C Unit

220

０６／０７／２６　１７：５１：３０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２２５　

－

－－

When theindicator in this button is off, no airflows to the rear vents, The rearcontrol panel cannot be used by asecond row passenger to adjust therear A/C. When the indicator in thisbutton is on, the rear fantemperature can be adjusted withthe REAR button in the center of thefront control panel. In addition, therear control panel can be used by asecond row passenger to adjust therear fan speed, airflow, andtemperature.

When theindicator in this button is on, the rearcontrol panel is disabled, and therear A/C can only be controlled bythe front control panel.

When theindicator in this button is off, no airflows to the rear vents. When theindicator is on, the rear fan speedcan be adjusted with the rear fanspeed button. In addition, when theindicator is on, the rear control panelcan be used by a second rowpassenger to adjust the rear fanspeed, airflow, and temperature.

When the REAR LOCK button is on,the rear temperature is controlled bythe driver’s side temperature controlswitch.

(On front control panel)On Touring models

On EX, EX-L and Touring modelsOn EX and EX-L models


REAR A/C ControlsREAR Button

REAR LOCK ButtonREAR Button

Features

221

EX and EX-L models Touring models

REAR LOCK BUTTON REAR LOCK BUTTON

REAR BUTTON REAR FAN SPEEDBUTTON

REAR TEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTON

REAR BUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：５１：３７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２２６　

The rear control panel can only beused when the rear controller dial onthe front control panel is in the ONposition.

The rear control panel can only beused when the indicator in the REARLOCK button on the front controlpanel is off.

Turn the rear temperature controldial clockwise to increase thetemperature of the airflow.

When is selected, airflow isdivided between the rear floor ventsand rear ceiling vents.

When is selected, air flowsfrom the rear floor vents.

When is selected, air flowsfrom the rear ceiling vents.

Select the vents the air flows fromwith the mode control dial.

Turn the fan control dial clockwiseto increase fan speed and airflow.

When you press the CTRL buttoninside the fan control dial, theindicator comes on, and the fanspeed is changed by turning the dial.

On EX and EX-L modelsOn LX model

On LX, EX and EX-L modelsRear Control Panel


222

FAN CONTROLDIAL

FAN CONTROLDIAL

CTRL BUTTONREAR TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

REAR TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

MODE CONTROLDIAL

MODE CONTROLDIAL

EX and EX-L modelsLX model

０６／０７／２６　１７：５１：４９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２２７　

▲

▼

▲

▼

Press the top ( ) of the fan controlbutton to increase the fan speed andairflow. Press the bottom ( ) of thebutton to decrease it. The level ofthe fan speed is shown in the display.

Each time you press the modebutton, the mode display changesfrom , to , then to

.

When is selected, air flowsfrom the rear ceiling vents.

When is selected, air flowsfrom the rear floor vents.

When is selected, airflow isdivided between the rear floor ventsand rear ceiling vents.

Pressing the AUTO button puts thesystem in automatic operation mode.The rear system automaticallyadjusts the fan speed and airflowlevels to maintain the selectedtemperature of the rear passengercompartment.

Pressing the OFF button shuts offthe rear climate control system.

The rear control panel can only beused when the indicator in the REARLOCK button on the front controlpanel is off.

Press the top ( ) of thetemperature control button toincrease the temperature of airflow,and the bottom ( ) of the button todecrease it. The temperature youadjust is shown in the system display.

On Touring models

Rear Climate Control

Features

223

Touring models

TEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTON

FAN CONTROLBUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：５２：０１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２２８　

The direction and quantity of airflowfrom each rear ceiling vent isadjustable.

To adjust the direction of air comingfrom a rear ceiling vent, move thetab in the center of each vent back-and-forth, and rotate the vent withthe tab. The lever next to each ventcan be opened and closed to regulatethe amount of airflow.

The climate control system has threesensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. There is also a rearsensor on the rear sidewall near theexhaust vent. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors

Rear Ceiling Vents

Rear Climate Control, Climate Control Sensors

224

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSORTAB

LEVER

０６／０７／２６　１７：５２：０７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２２９　

CONTINUED

Playing the AM/FM Radio

Features

225

FM BUTTON AM/FM BUTTON

LX model

U. S. model is shown.

SEEK BAR SEEK BAR

PRESET BUTTONSPRESET BUTTONS

EX and EX-L models without RearEntertainment System

AM BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON AUTO SELECT BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE KNOBSOUNDKNOB

PWR/VOL KNOB

０６／０７／２６　１７：５２：１４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２３０　


226

SEEK BAR

SCAN BUTTON

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

EX-L and Touring models with Rear Entertainment Systemwithout Navigation System

AM/FM BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

EX-L and Touring models with Rear Entertainment Systemwith Navigation System

PRESET BUTTONS

U. S. models are shown.

PWR/VOL KNOB TUNE/SOUND KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

SEEK BARAM/FM BUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：５２：２１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２３１　

－

－

＋－

－

－

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button, or AM/FM button. Onthe FM band, ST will be displayed ifthe station is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction in AM is notavailable.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate itpress the or side of the bar,then release it.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: thepreset buttons, and .

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan fora station with a strong signal. Whenit finds one, it will stop and play thatstation for about 5 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 5 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

TUNE

SEEK Preset

To Select a Station

TUNE, SEEK, SCAN,AUTO SELECT

To Play the AM/FM Radio

SCAN


Features

227

０６／０７／２６　１７：５２：３２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２３２　

－

－

－

To turn off auto select

On models with navigation system

, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN functions to find stations, thenstore them in the preset buttons asdescribed.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’appears in the display, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

Press the SOUND (TUNE) knobrepeatedly to display the bass, treble,balance, and fader settings.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the SOUND(TUNE) knob to adjust the setting toyour liking. When the level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘C’’ or‘‘CENTER’’ in the display. Thesystem will automatically return thedisplay to the selected audio modeabout 5 seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

Use the TRE/BASmodes to adjust the tone to yourliking.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

The audio system for your vehiclecan also be operated by voice control.See the navigation section in yourquick start guide for an overview ofthis system, and the navigationsystem manual for complete details.


AUTO SELECT Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

Voice Control System

228

０６／０７／２６　１７：５２：４２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２３３　

－

－

In addition to the knobs and buttonson the radio control panel, you canoperate some of the radio controlson the navigation system screen.

While you are listening to the radio,you can change to another band bypressing the AUDIO button next tothe navigation system screen, andthen touching the desired band icon(FM1, FM2, or AM).

AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SEEKare adjustable from the navigationscreen. For an explanation of thesefunctions, see pages and .

Touch theAUTO SELECT icon to activate theauto select function. You will seeAUTO SEL in the upper display.

Touch the SCAN icon toactivate the scan function. You willsee SCAN on the display. Touch theicon again to deactivate it.

227 228

CONTINUED


Operating the Radio on theNavigation System Screen

AUTO SELECT

SCAN


Features

229

AUDIO BUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：５２：４９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２３４　

－

－

＋－ You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the system is turnedoff.

To adjust the trebleand bass, touch or on eachside of the treble or bass adjustmentbar. The adjustment bar shows youthe current setting.

These modes adjustthe strength of the sound comingfrom each speaker. Left/Rightbalance adjusts the side-to-sidestrength, while Front/Rear faderadjust the front-to-back strength. Toadjust the left/right balance, touchthe ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon.

To adjust the front/rear fader, touchthe ‘‘FR’’ or ‘‘RR’’ icon.

To see the audio display when youare finished adjusting the sound,wait 5 seconds.

You can also adjust the sound fromthe navigation screen.

To adjust the sound, push theAUDIO button, then enter the soundgrid by touching the SOUND icon onthe display.

142

Audio System LightingTreble/Bass

Left/Right Balance and Front/Rear Fader


Adjusting the Sound

230

０６／０７／２６　１７：５２：５７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２３５　

CONTINUED

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

Features

231

０６／０７／２６　１７：５３：０６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２３６　

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources(such as garages or parkingstructures) can cause temporaryreception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio Reception

232

０６／０７／２６　１７：５３：１２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２３７　

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

Features

233

PWR/VOL KNOB

CATEGORY BAR

TUNE KNOB

PRESETBUTTONS

XM BUTTON


SCAN BUTTON CATEGORY BAR

DISP/MODEBUTTON

DISP/MODEBUTTON

EX-L and Touring models withRear Entertainment Systemand Navigation System

EX and EX-L models without Rear Entertainment System

SCAN BUTTON XM BUTTON DISP/MODE BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

PWR/VOL KNOB TUNE KNOB

SCAN BUTTON CATEGORY BAR PRESETBUTTONS

TUNE KNOBXM BUTTONPWR/VOL KNOB

０６／０７／２６　１７：５３：２２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２３８　

－

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

On the audio display, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:Channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

In channel mode, you can select allof the available channels. In categorymode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,etc., you can select all of thechannels within that category.

To listen to XM radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem, and press the ‘‘XM’’ button.Adjust the volume by turning thePWR/VOL knob. The last channelyou listened to will show in thedisplay.

U.S. models withoutnavigation systems are XM ready,but they require additionalequipment for XM to be operational.Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Satellite Radioanywhere in the United States,except Hawaii and Alaska.

XM radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.The navigation system screen alsoshows all XM information when theAUDIO button is pressed.

You can also change to the XM radiowhile you are listening to an FMstation, AM station, CD, etc., bytouching the XM1 or XM2 icon onthe audio display (navigation systemscreen).

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes.

On U.S. models with navigation system


Operating the XM Radio

MODE

234

NOTE:

０６／０７／２６　１７：５３：３１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２３９　

－

－－＋

－

－

On models with a rear entertainmentsystem and a navigation system, youcannot listen to XM Radio and a discat the same time. For example, whenXM Radio is playing on the frontspeakers, you cannot listen to a discon the rear speakers, or vice versa.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN/RPT button ortouch the SCAN icon on the audiodisplay. The system plays eachchannel in numerical order for a few

seconds, then selects the nextchannel. When you hear a channelyou want to continue listening to,press the button or touch the iconagain.

Press either side ofthe bar ( or ) to select anothercategory.

Press the XM RADIO button.Either XM1 or XM2 will show inthe display.

To store a channel:

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons or preset icons on the audiodisplay. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

Turn the tune knob left orright to select channels. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Pick the preset button (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the button (icon) until youhear a beep.

Use the TUNE knob, theCATEGORY bar, or the SCANbutton to tune to a desired channel.You can also touch the SCAN iconon the audio display.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.Press the XM RADIO button againor touch the other XM icon (XM1or XM2) on the audio display.Store the next six channels usingsteps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button(icon) to tune to it.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.


SCAN

CATEGORY

Preset

TUNE

Features

235

０６／０７／２６　１７：５３：４１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２４０　

－

－

－

－－

－

－XM is loading the

audio or programinformation.

The channelcurrently selected isno longerbroadcasting.

The signal iscurrently tooweak. Move thevehicle to an areaaway from tallbuildings, andwith anunobstructed viewof the southernhorizon.

The encryptioncode is beingupdated. Waituntil theencryption code isfully updated.Channels 0 and 1should still worknormally.

The selected channelnumber does not exist oris not part of yoursubscription.

This channel has noartist or titleinformation at thistime.

There is a problemwith the XMantenna. Pleaseconsult your dealer.


XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘UPDATING’’ ‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘NO INFO’’

‘‘CHECKANTENNA’’

236

TM

０６／０７／２６　１７：５３：４８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２４１　

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.

CONTINUED


Features

237

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

Signal may be blocked by mountainsor large obstacles to the south.

Signal weaker in these areas.

０６／０７／２６　１７：５３：５２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２４２　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM satellite radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem and press the XM RADIObutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in thesatellite radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,and you’ll be able to listen to XMradio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom the activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

There may also be other geographicsituations or structures that couldaffect satellite radio reception.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


238

０６／０７／２６　１７：５４：０２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２４３　

＋

－－

＋

CONTINUED

Playing a CD, CD Changer

Features

239

LX model

AM BUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

DISC BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON DISC BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

LOAD BUTTON

CD BUTTON

CD SLOT

EJECT BUTTON

U. S. model is shown


CD SLOT

FM BUTTONEJECT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

CD BUTTON

DISC BUTTON

SEEK BAR

LOAD INDICATOR

DISC BUTTON

SEEK BAR

０６／０７／２６　１７：５４：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２４４　

－

－

＋

＋


240

CD BUTTON SEEK BAR

DISC BUTTON

EX-L and Touring models with Rear EntertainmentSystem without Navigation System

REPEAT BUTTON

EX-L and Touring models with Rear Entertainment Systemand Navigation System

LOAD BUTTON

DISC BUTTON


LOAD INDICATOR

LOAD BUTTON

CD SLOT

EJECT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

DISC BUTTON

LOAD INDICATOR EJECT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON CD BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON SEEK BAR

DISC BUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：５４：１７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２４５　

＋

－

－

－

With the ignition in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,insert a CD into the CD slot. Thedrive will pull the CD in the rest ofthe way and begin to play it. Youoperate the CD player with the samecontrols used for the radio. Thenumber of the track playing is shownin the display. The system willcontinuously play a CD until youchange modes.

Each time you press and release theside of the SKIP bar, the player

skips forward to the beginning of thenext track. Press and release theside of the SKIP bar to skipbackward to the beginning of theprevious track.

Press the AM or FM button toswitch to the radio while a CD isplaying. Press the CD button to playthe CD.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the CD will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

To continuously replaya track, press the RPT button. Youwill see RPT in the display. Press itagain to turn it off.

This feature plays thetracks in random order. To activaterandom play, press and release theRDM button. You will see RDM inthe display. This continues until youpress the RDM button again.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

On LX modelCD Player To Stop Playing a CDTo Change Tracks

REPEAT

RANDOM

Playing a CD, CD Player

Features

241

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause the CDto jam in the unit.

０６／０７／２６　１７：５４：２６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２４６　

Your audio system has an in-dashCD changer that holds up to six CDs,providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio.

To load CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

Press and hold the LOAD buttonbeside the CD slot until you see‘‘LOADING’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

To load multiple CDs in oneoperation:

The CD changer is behind thenavigation system screen. To use theCD changer, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the CD changer appears.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the OPEN buttonagain. Do not use the folded screenas a tray. If you put a cup, forexample, on the screen, the liquidinside the cup may spill on thescreen when you go over a bump.

1.

On vehicles with navigation system

On vehicles with navigation systemOn EX, EX-L and Touring modelsLoading CDs in the Changer


242

OPEN BUTTON

LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR

The label can curl up and cause the CDto jam in the unit.

０６／０７／２６　１７：５４：３６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２４７　

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.

Operating the CD Changer

An optional six disc CD changer is available for your vehicle from yourdealer. Refer to the six disc in-dash CD changer. Operating Instructions supplied with the unit.

On LX modelOperating the Optional CD Changer

To load a single CD:

The indicators above the discbuttons of the empty positions willblink, and the green load indicatorabove the CD slot comes on.

Press and release the LOADbutton.

The system will load the CD andbegin playing it.

If you press the LOAD button whilea CD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate disc button.Select an empty disc button (theindicator above the button is off),and press the button. The systemwill stop playing the current CD andstart the loading sequence. It willthen play the CD just loaded.

Insert a CD into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD load indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

When LOADING appears again inthe display, insert the next CD intothe CD slot.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the first CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, the system willwait for 10 seconds, then stop theload operation and begin playing thelast CD loaded.

The indicators above the Discbuttons of the empty positions willblink, and the green CD loadindicator comes on. When you see‘‘LOADING’’ in the display, insertthe disc into the CD slot. Insert itonly about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way.

2.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

3.

CONTINUED


Features

243

０６／０７／２６　１７：５４：４５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２４８　

On vehicles without navigation systemTo load multiple CDs in oneoperation:

On the upper right side of thedisplay, the disc number for anempty position will begin blinking,and the green CD load indicatorwill come on.

Insert the CD into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD loaded indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

To load a single CD:

Press and release the LOADbutton.

When the disc number for anempty position starts to blink andthe green CD load indicator comeson, you will see LOAD in thedisplay. Insert the disc into the CDslot. Insert it only about halfway,the drive will pull it in the rest ofthe way.

The system will load the CD andbegin playing it.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the LOAD buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, the system willwait for ten seconds, then stop theload operation and begin playing thelast CD loaded.

Press and hold the LOAD buttonbeside the CD slot until you see‘‘LOADING’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

When ‘‘LOADING’’ appears againin the display, insert the next CDinto the CD slot.

1.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.2.

3.


244

０６／０７／２６　１７：５４：５６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２４９　

－

－＋

＋

－

＋

－

－

－Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ inthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

When that CD ends, the next CD inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last CD finishes, thesystem returns to CD 1.

You can use the SKIP bar while adisc is playing to select passages andchange tracks.

To select a different CD, press theappropriate preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will go intothe loading sequence.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theSKIP bar. You will hear a beep and

the system will continue to movethrough the track. Press the sideof the SKIP bar to move forward, orthe side to move backward.Release the bar when the systemreaches the point you want.

On models with a rear entertainmentsystem and a navigation system, youcannot listen to a disc and XM Radioat the same time. For example, whena disc is playing on the frontspeakers, you cannot listen to XMRadio on the rear speakers, or viceversa.

Each time you press the side ofthe SKIP bar, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release the sideto skip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

This feature,when activated, plays the trackswithin a CD in random order, ratherthan in the order they are recordedon the CD. To activate random play,press the RDM button. You will seeRDM in the display. The system willthen select and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivaterandom play by pressing the RDMbutton again, or you select adifferent CD with a preset button.

To activate the repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay as a reminder. The systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing either side of theSKIP bar also turns off the repeatfeature.

CONTINUED

On vehicles without navigation systemTo Play a CD

To Change Tracks

RANDOM PLAY

REPEAT


Features

245

０６／０７／２６　１７：５５：０６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２５０　

When you press and release the RPTbutton or touch the TRACK RPTicon on the upper display, the systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. As a reminder, you will seeREPEAT (TRACK REPEAT) in thedisplay. To turn this feature off,press the RPT button, or touch theTRACK REPEAT icon again.

When you press and hold the RPTbutton until REPEAT is in thedisplay, or when you touch the DISCRPT icon on the audio display, thesystem continuously replays thecurrent disc. As a reminder, you willsee D-RPT (DISC RPT) in thedisplay.

When you press and hold the SCANbutton until you see D-Scan in thedisplay, or when you touch the DISCSCAN icon on the upper display, thefirst track of the current CD playsfor about 10 seconds. You will see D-SCAN in the display and DISC SCANin the upper display. To hear the restof the CD, press the SCAN button ortouch the DISC SCAN icon again,within 10 seconds. If you don’t, thesystem advances to the next disc,plays about 10 seconds of it, andcontinues throughout the rest of theCDs the same way. When thesystem reaches the last disc, DISCSCAN is cancelled, and the CD playsnormally.

When you press the SCAN button ortouch the TRACK SCAN icon on theupper display, the first track of thecurrent disc plays for about 10seconds. You will see SCAN in theupper display and in the audiodisplay. To hear the rest of the track,press the SCAN button or touch theTRACK SCAN icon again within 10seconds. If you don’t, the systemadvances to the next track, playsabout 10 seconds of it, and continuesthrough the rest of the tracks thesame way.

On vehicles with navigation system Track Repeat

Disc Repeat

Disc ScanTrack Scan


246

０６／０７／２６　１７：５５：１３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２５１　

When you press the RDM button ortouch the TRACK RANDOM icon onthe upper display, the system playsthe tracks of the current disc inrandom order. You will seeRANDOM (TRACK RANDOM) inthe display. To turn this feature off,press the RDM button (touchTRACK RANDOM) again.Operation of TRACK SCAN, DISCSCAN, TRACK REPEAT, DISCREPEAT, and TRACK RANDOM onthe upper display is possible onlywhen the audio display is in theupright position.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button or SATRADIO button (U.S. models). Eachtime you press the AM/FM button,the system changes to the nextmode (AM, FM1, or FM2). Whenyou return to CD mode by pressingthe CD button, play will continue

where it left off.

To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the indicatorsabove the disc buttons blink.

To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is on or off:

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

To remove the disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe appropriate disc button orcorresponding number on the presetbutton. When that disc beginsplaying, press the eject button.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.When you remove the disc from theslot, the system automatically beginsthe load sequence so you can loadanother disc in that position. If youdo not load another disc within 15seconds, the system selects theprevious mode [AM, FM1, FM2,tape, or XM Radio (U.S. models)].

If you do not remove the CD fromthe slot, the system will reload theCD after 10 seconds and put the CDchanger in pause mode. To beginplaying the CD, press the CD button.

Random Play

To Stop Playing a Disc

Removing CDs from the Changer


Features

247

０６／０７／２６　１７：５５：２３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２５２　

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used.

CD-RW discs will not work in thisunit.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly or possibly jam in the drive.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the CD changer.

General Information Protecting CDs

Protecting Your CDs

248

０６／０７／２６　１７：５５：３２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２５３　

Message SolutionCauseIf you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.

Press the disc eject button, and remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If the code does not disappearor the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult yourdealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

CD Changer Error Messages

Features

249

０６／０７／２６　１７：５５：３７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２５４　

Playing a Tape

250

FF BUTTON

SKIP BAR

DOLBYNR BUTTON

DOLBYNR BUTTON

LX model

REW BUTTON REW BUTTON

FF BUTTON

SKIP BAR


RPT BUTTON

PLAY/PROGBUTTON

PLAY/PROGBUTTON

RPT BUTTONU.S. model is shown.

０６／０７／２６　１７：５５：４２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２５５　

Playing a Tape

Features

251

FF BUTTON

SKIP BAR

SKIP BAR

DOLBYNR BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

PLAY/PROG BUTTON

REW BUTTON

PLAY/PROGBUTTON

REW BUTTON

DOLBY NR BUTTON

FF BUTTON

EX-L and Touring models with Rear Entertainment Systemand Navigation System


U.S models are shown.

０６／０７／２６　１７：５５：４８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２５６　

＊

－

▲

＊

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator will come on in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing theNR button. Dolby remains off untilyou press the NR button again.

To remove the tape, press theEJECT button. If you want to turnthe player off, press the PWR/VOLknob or turn off the ignition. Thetape will remain in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, thetape will begin playing where it leftoff.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press the AMor FM button or AM/FM button, orCD button. To change back to thetape player, press the AUX button.

To rewind the tape,push the REW button. You will seeREW in the display. To fast forwardthe tape, push the FF button. Youwill see FF displayed. Press the FF,REW, or PLAY/PROG button totake the system out of rewind or fastforward.

The tape direction indicator willcome on to show you which side ofthe tape is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted upward is nowplaying. If you want to play the otherside, press the PLAY/PROG button.When the player reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Make sure the open side ofthe tape is facing right, then insertthe tape most of the way into the slot.The system will pull the tape in therest of the way and begin to play it.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Optional on all models except Touringwith rear entertainment system andnavigation system

To Play a Tape

To Stop Playing a Tape

Tape Search FunctionsFF/REW

Playing a Tape

252

０６／０７／２６　１７：５５：５６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２５７　

－－

＋

－

Press the side of theSKIP bar to find the beginning of thecurrent song or passage. Press the

side of the SKIP bar to find thebeginning of a song or passage.When the system reaches thebeginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand causes the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your dealer has acleaning kit available.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam in the drive.

Press the RPT buttonto continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button again.

The skip and repeatfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the tape player.

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

SKIP Caring for the Tape and Player

REPEAT

Playing a Tape

Features

253

NOTE:

０６／０７／２６　１７：５６：０４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２５８　

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you mayneed to set the clock. You can quickly set the time to the

nearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing andholding the CLOCK button, thenpressing the R (RESET) button setsthe clock back to the previous hour.If the displayed time is after the halfhour, the clock sets forward to thebeginning of the next hour.

When you are finished, press theCLOCK button again.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

Press and hold the CLOCK buttonuntil the clock flashes. Change thehours by pressing the H button untilthe numbers advance to the desiredtime. Change the minutes bypressing the M button until thenumbers advance to the desired time.

Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

On models without navigation system


Setting the Clock

254

CLOCK BUTTON

R BUTTON

M BUTTON

CLOCK BUTTON

H BUTTON R BUTTONM BUTTON

LX model EX and EX-L models

H BUTTON

U.S. model is shown.

０６／０７／２６　１７：５６：１４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２５９　

＋

－

＋－

＋

－

▲ ▼

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM Radio (U.S. models), CD (if adisc is loaded) or a tape (if theoptional tape player is installed and atape is loaded).

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the display.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. They let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the steering wheel.

If you are playing a tape, press thetop ( ) of the CH button to advanceto the next selection. Press thebottom ( ) to go back to theprevious selection. The systemsenses a silent period, then goesback to play mode.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.


Remote Audio Controls

Features

255

MODE BUTTONVOL BUTTON

CH BUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：５６：２１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２６０　

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code withthe preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from the fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have 10 tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in 10 attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from your dealer.To do this, you will need the audiosystem’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see CODE in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.The code is on the radio code cardincluded in your owner’s manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.


Radio Theft Protection

256

０６／０７／２６　１７：５６：２６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２６１　

CONTINUED

Rear Entertainment System

Features

257

Overhead Screen Unit

DVD Player

Models with Navigation System

Models without Navigation System

REAR CTRL KNOB


REAR PWR BUTTON

REAR CTRL KNOBREAR PWR BUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：５６：３３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２６２　

Press the REAR PWR button. Toturn on the rear controls (ceilingpanel/remote control), press the RRCTRL knob. The system’s iconshows in the upper display. Yourpassengers can then operate the rearsystem with the control panel in theceiling. The rear control panel can beused as a remote control when it isdetached from the ceiling unit. Pressthe RR CTRL knob again to turn therear controls off. You will see theRear Controls Off icon in the upperdisplay.

The rear system selects the source itwas last set to. If that source hasbeen removed (the DVD has beenejected from the player, for example),you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in thedisplay. You should select anothersource or insert a DVD.

When you turn on the system, therear speakers are automaticallyturned off if the rear system selectsa different entertainment sourcethan the front system. You will seethe Rear Speakers Off icon in theupper display. The sound for the rearsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones.

If you want to turn the rear speakerson again, press and hold the REARPWR button until the Rear SpeakersOff icon goes off.

The rear speakers areconnected to the front system, sothey will always play the source thatthe front system is set to.

Your vehicle is equipped with a rearentertainment system that includes aDVD player for the enjoyment of therear passengers.

With this system, the rearpassengers can enjoy a differententertainment source (radio, CDchanger, DVD player, or optionaltape player) than the front seatoccupants. The audio is broadcastthrough the supplied wirelessheadphones.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position to operate the rearentertainment system.

Available on EX-L and Touring models To Turn On the System Rear Speakers


258

NOTE:

０６／０７／２６　１７：５６：４１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２６３　

The DVD player in your rearentertainment system can play DVDvideo discs and CDs.

Open the overhead screen bypushing the OPEN button. Thescreen will swing down part-way.Pivot the screen the rest of the way.If you pivot the screen too farforward, past the second detent, thedisplay will turn off. Pivot the screenback to the second or first detent toturn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

To operate the rear entertainmentsystem from the front panel, turn theRR CTRL knob counterclockwise.The amber RR LED comes on toshow that the control panel isenabled.

If CDs are loaded in the CD changer,select CD. If a CD is loaded in thelower player, select DVD/AUX.

To play the radio, the buttons for thefront entertainment system have thesame functions.

CONTINUED

To Select Rear Entertainmentfrom the Front Control Panel

Operating the DVD Player fromthe Front Control Panel


Features

259

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OPEN BUTTON

OVERHEAD SCREEN

０６／０７／２６　１７：５６：４９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２６４　

－

－

Turn the Rear CTRL knob clockwise.The amber Rear LED comes on toshow that the control panel is nowenabled.

Insert a DVD into the DVD/CDplayer below the front panel.

Push the DVD in halfway, the drivewill pull it in the rest of the way.

Press the PLAY button ifthe DVD does not start playingautomatically.

Press the PAUSE buttonto pause the DVD. Press the buttonagain or press PLAY to resume.Pause works only with the DVDplayer.

PLAY

PAUSE


260

PLAY BUTTON

PLAY BUTTON PAUSEBUTTON

Models with Navigation System

Models without Navigation System


REAR CTRL KNOB SEEK/SKIP BAR

PAUSE BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

REAR CTRL KNOB

０６／０７／２６　１７：５６：５８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２６５　

－＋

－

＋

－

－Press and hold theside to move forward; you will see

‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Press and holdthe side to move backward; youwill see ‘‘REV’’ in the display.Release the bar when the systemreaches the point you want.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the

system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track orchapter. Press and release theside of the bar to skip backward tothe beginning of the current track orchapter. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track orchapter.

Press the eject button toremove the DVD from the drive.

To return front panel control to thefront audio system, turn the REARCTRL knob counterclockwise.

To turn on the rear entertainmentsystem from the rear control panel,press the PWR button. Use the AM/FM button, XM button (U.S. models),CD button, DVD/AUX button (U.S.models), or AUX button (Canadianmodels) to select the entertainmentsource. The selected source will beshown in the display. Make sure therear control operation has not beendisabled with the REAR CTRL knobon the front panel.

SEEK/SKIP EJECT

To Return to Front AudioControls

Using the Rear Control Panel


Features

261

０６／０７／２６　１７：５７：０４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２６６　

▲ ▼

▲▼

▲ ▼

Use the and buttons to select astation from the preset buttons.Press the button to tune the radioto a higher frequency, or press thebutton to tune to a lower frequency.Pressing the or buttoncauses the system to search up ordown the band for a station with astrong signal. You will see SEEK inthe display.

Use the and buttons to select astation from the preset buttons.Press the button to search upthe channels in the channel mode.The system will search up thechannels within the category whenthe radio is in the category mode.Press the button to searchdown the channels in the channelmode. The system will search down

the channels within the categorywhen the radio is in the categorymode.

On U. S. models

To Play the Radio from the RearControl Panel

To Play the XM Radio from theRear Control Panel


262

XM BUTTON CD BUTTON

DISP BUTTON

PWR BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON DVD/AUXBUTTON


０６／０７／２６　１７：５７：０９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２６７　

▲ ▼

Press the or button toselect another category.

Pressing and holding the DISPbutton for more than 5 seconds willchange the search mode betweenChannel Search and CategorySearch. Each time you press andrelease the DISP button, the displayabove the rear control panel changesin the following sequence: ChannelNumber, Category Name, MusicName, Artist Name, Channel Name,and back to Channel Number.

If CDs are loaded in the CD changer,select them by pressing the CDbutton. If a CD is loaded in the DVDplayer, press the DVD/AUX button.

To rewind the tape, push thebutton. You will see REW in

the display. To fast forward the tape,push the button. You will seeFF displayed.

Press the button to find thebeginning of the current song orpassage. Press the button tofind the beginning of the next songor passage.

Press the button to change thetape direction.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or button.The system will continue to movethrough the track. Press the

button to move forward, or thebutton to move backward.

Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

If CDs are loaded in the CD changerand the overhead screen is not open,pressing the or button changesthe discs.

To Play a CD from the RearControl Panel

To Play the Optional Tape Playerfrom the Rear Control Panel


Features

263

０６／０７／２６　１７：５７：１７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２６８　

The video screen is for use by rearseat passengers only. The driver andfront seat passenger should not tryto view the screen while driving.

Press the button when youwant to pause the DVD. Press thisbutton again to go back to PLAY.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next chapter. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current chapter.

To move rapidly within a chapter,press and hold the or

button. The system willcontinue to move through the

chapter. Press the button tomove forward, or the button tomove backward. Release the buttonwhen the system reaches the pointyou want.To select the menu on the DVD,press the MENU/SCROLL button(U.S. models) or MENU button(Canadian models). Use the ,

, , and buttons tomove to the desired menu selection,then press the ENT button to enteryour selection.

Open the overhead screen bypushing the OPEN button. Thescreen will swing down part-way.Pivot the screen the rest of the way.If you pivot the screen too farforward, past the second detent, thedisplay will turn off. Pivot the screenback to the second or first detent toturn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

To Play a DVD from the RearControl Panel


264

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OVERHEAD SCREEN

DISP BUTTON

OPENBUTTON

ENT BUTTON


MENU/SCROLL BUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：５７：２７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２６９　

When you press the DISP buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the title,chapter, elapsed time, and personalsurround logo are displayed(STATUS 1).

When you press the DISP buttonagain, the subtitle, audio, angle,sound characteristics, and personalsurround logo are displayed(STATUS 2).

To go back to play, press the DISPbutton.

DISP Button


Features

265

０６／０７／２６　１７：５７：３４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２７０　

When you press the MENU buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the DVD’smain menu is displayed. To go backto play, press the RETURN button.

When you press the SETUP buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the DVD’ssetup menu is displayed at thebottom of the screen. You can thenchange various settings of play mode,personal surround, and display. Togo back to play without changing anysetting, press the RETURN orSETUP button, or select ‘‘Close’’ bypressing the or button,then press the ENT button.

When you select ‘‘Play Mode’’ bypressing the or button, theplay mode setup menu is displayedabove the ‘‘Play Mode’’ icon.

MENU Button System Messages Play Mode


266

０６／０７／２６　１７：５７：４１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２７１　

▼ ▲▼ ▲

▼ ▲

Top Menu Audio

When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’using the or button, the DVD’stitle menu is displayed. This menu isalso displayed when you press theMENU button while a DVD is notplaying.

When you select ‘‘Audio’’ from theplay mode setup menu by pressingthe or button, you will see asubmenu of the dubbed language.

The selectable languages vary fromDVD to DVD, and this feature maynot be available on some DVDs.

Press the RETURN or ENT buttonto go back to the play mode setupmenu.

Select the desired language bypressing the or button. Thesound characteristics (Dolby Digital,LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recordedwith the selected language are alsodisplayed next to the language.

To go back to play, press the returnbutton.

CONTINUED


Features

267

０６／０７／２６　１７：５７：５０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２７２　

▼ ▲

▼▲ ▼ ▲

▼ ▲

Subtitle Angle

To turn the subtitle on and off, select‘‘Subtitle’’ from the setup menu bypressing the or button. You willsee submenu ‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON.’’ Select‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON’’ by pressing the or

button.

If more than one subtitle language isavailable, you will see the languagecurrently selected when you select‘‘ON’’ in the previous step.Select the desired subtitle languageby pressing the or button.Press the RETURN or ENT buttonto go back to the play mode setupmenu.

On some DVDs, the scenes arerecorded by more than one camera,giving different viewpoints of thesame scene. To change the angle,select ‘‘Angle’’ from the setup menu.You will see a submenu if there aredifferent angles available.Select the number on the submenuby pressing the or button.Press the RETURN or ENT buttonto go back to the play mode setupmenu.


268

０６／０７／２６　１７：５７：５９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２７３　

▼ ▲

▼ ▲

▼ ▲

▼▲

Search

When you select ‘‘Search’’ from theplay mode setup menu, you will seethe submenu shown above. In theleft submenu, you can selectbetween ‘‘Title’’ and ‘‘Chapter.’’ Theright submenu displays the currenttitle or chapter number and the totalnumber of titles or chapters.

To do a title search, select ‘‘Title’’ bypressing the or button. Changethe number on the right submenu bypressing the or button, andpress the ENT button to begin thetitle search. If you press theRETURN button, the display returnsto the play mode setup menu withoutdoing the search.

To do a chapter search, select‘‘Chapter’’ by pressing the orbutton. Change the number on theright submenu by pressing the or

button, and press the ENT buttonto begin the chapter search. If youpress the RETURN button, thedisplay returns to the play modesetup menu without doing the search.

CONTINUED


Features

269

０６／０７／２６　１７：５８：０６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２７４　

NumInput

A numerical command can be issuedto a DVD by inputting a two digitnumber, and a button number can beselected on the screen.

Select and enter the second digitnumber the same way. The cursorwill automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’icon when you press the ENT button.Press the ENT button to enter thenumber command. To go back to theDVD screen, press the RETURNbutton.

Select the first digit number usingthe , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. If you want tochange the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’and press the ENT button, thenselect and enter the new number.

Select the ‘‘Num Input’’ from the playmode setup menu. The screen willchange as shown above. If you selectthe ‘‘Move Key’’ using the ,

, , or button, andpress the ENT button, the NumInput display on the screen will

change from the left side to rightside or right to left.


270

０６／０７／２６　１７：５８：１４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２７５　

▼ ▲

When you select ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ by pressing the

or button, the personalsurround setup menu is displayedabove the ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ icon. You can adjust these display

settings:Back LightContrastBrightnessTintColor

To adjust the display, select‘‘Display’’ by pressing the or

button, and enter yourselection by pressing the ENTbutton. The display changes asshown above.

Selecting one of the sound effects,Cinema, Music, or Voice, from thepersonal surround menu allows youto change the sound in yourheadphones to match the disc youare playing.

Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’by pressing the or button, andenter your selection by pressing theENT button. The ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ logo is displayed inthe upper right corner of the screen.

If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logodisappears, and there will be nospecial sound effect.

CONTINUED

Personal Surround Display


Features

271

０６／０７／２６　１７：５８：２３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２７６　

▼ ▲▼ ▲

Select the quality you want to adjustby pressing the or button, andthen pressing the ENT button. Theadjustment bar is displayed next tothe selected item. Adjust the settingby pressing the or button.When you are finished with youradjustment, press the ENT button.

If you want to set the display to thedefault setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ bypressing the or button, and,then pressing the ENT button.

The display changes as shown above.

Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENTbutton. You will see the message‘‘Default display settings applied’’ onthe display for 5 seconds.


272

０６／０７／２６　１７：５８：３０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２７７　

Screen ModeYou can set the screen mode tothese settings:

NormalWideZoomFull

CONTINUED


Features

273

Normal Wide

Zoom Full

０６／０７／２６　１７：５８：３６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２７８　

▼ ▲

Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressingthe or button, then pressthe ENT button.

The selectable setting menu isdisplayed, and the current setting ishighlighted in blue.

Select the desired setting bypressing the or button, thenpress the ENT button.

The selected setting will behighlighted in blue for one second,and the screen returns to the playmode in the selected setting.


274

０６／０７／２６　１７：５８：４１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２７９　

▼ ▲

When you press the SETUP buttonon the rear control panel when aDVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIALSETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.

When you select ‘‘Language’’ withthe or button, the menushown above appears.

To return to the stop or prestopscreen, select ‘‘Close’’ using the

or button, and then pressthe ENT, or the SETUP button.

To select the language used in theDISC menus, select ‘‘Menu Lang’’ bypressing the or button. You willsee the submenu next to ‘‘MenuLang.’’

There are two selectable menus:‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’

Menu Language

CONTINUED

INITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)


Features

275

０６／０７／２６　１７：５８：５０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２８０　

▼ ▲Select the desired language bypressing the or button, andthen pressing the ENT button.

The selectable languages are,English, French, Spanish, German,Italian, Dutch, and Japanese.

If you want another language thanthose listed, you need to enter thecode number of the desired language.Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENTbutton. The display changes asshown in the next column.

If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press theENT button, the display returns tothe initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’menu.


276

０６／０７／２６　１７：５８：５７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２８１　

▼ ▲

Audio Language

If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the displaychanges to the language code inputmode. Select the first number digitusing the , , , or

button, and press the ENTbutton to enter it. Repeat this until allfour digits are filled. When thefourth digit is entered, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel to enter the newlanguage code.

If you made a mistake entering anumber digit, select ‘‘DEL’’ on thedisplay with the , , ,or button, and press the ENTbutton on the control panel. Thenselect and enter the correct numberdigit as described. The displayreturns to the initial ‘‘Language’’menu screen.

You can select the dubbed languagebefore playing DVDs.Select ‘‘Audio Lang’’ by pressing the

or button. You will see thesubmenu next to ‘‘Audio Lang.’’

Follow the same instructions youused to set the menu language.

CONTINUED


Features

277

０６／０７／２６　１７：５９：０６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２８２　

▼ ▲

Subtitle Language

You can select the subtitle languagebefore playing DVDs.Select ‘‘Subtitle Lang’’ by pressingthe or button. You will see thesubmenu next to the ‘‘Subtitle Lang.’’

When you select ‘‘Others’’ at thebottom of the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’screen, the above menu appears onthe screen.

Dynamic Range

‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces thedifferences between the loud andquiet sound levels throughout thedisc. When this is on, the loudersounds are lowered, and quietersounds are increased.

Follow the same instructions youused to set the menu language.

INITIAL SETTINGS (Others)


278

０６／０７／２６　１７：５９：１３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２８３　

▼ ▲ ▼ ▲When you select the ‘‘DynamicRange’’ by pressing the orbutton, you will see the submenunext to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ asshown above.

To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressingthe or button, and thenpress the ENT button.

Angle Mark

When you switch to another anglewhile playing a DVD, the angle markis displayed in the upper right cornerof the screen.

You can set the system to display ornot display this angle mark.

Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing theor button. The above submenu

appears. If you want the angle markto be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the

or button, and then pressthe ENT button. The display returnsto the ‘‘Others’’ menu.

CONTINUED


Features

279

ANGLE MARK

０６／０７／２６　１７：５９：２１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２８４　

▼ ▲

Parental Control Level

You can place an auditory restrictionby changing the parental controllevel. The higher the level number,the lower the restriction.

Select ‘‘Parental Level’’ by pressingthe or button. You will see thesubmenu shown above. If you select‘‘No,’’ and press the ENT button, thedisplay returns to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.

When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’the display changes as shown above.To change the level, you need toenter your four digit password.Select the number for the first digitby pressing the , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. Repeat this until allfour digits are filled. When you enterthe fourth number, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel.


280

０６／０７／２６　１７：５９：２９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２８５　

▼ ▲

If the system does not recognize thepassword you entered, you will seethe above display. Repeat theparental control level steps until youenter the correct password.

If you enter the password correctly,you can then change the parentalcontrol level.

Once you correctly enter thepassword, press the or buttonto change the level, and then pressthe ENT button to enter yourselection.

Changing the Password

The password was set to ‘‘1111’’when the vehicle left the factory.

CONTINUED


Features

281

０６／０７／２６　１７：５９：３６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２８６　

To change the password, select‘‘Password.’’ You will see the abovemenu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ bypressing the or button,then press the ENT button.

If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press theENT button, the display returns tothe ‘‘Others’’ menu.

Select the first digit by pressing the, , , or button,

and enter it by pressing the ENTbutton. Repeat this until all fourdigits are entered. When you enterthe fourth number, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel.

If the system does not recognize thepassword you entered, you will seethe above display. Repeat thepassword setting steps until youenter the correct password.


282

０６／０７／２６　１７：５９：４４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２８７　

▲If you forget the password, select‘‘Password,’’ and press the button10 times.

The display changes as shown above.If you want to use the defaultpassword (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ andpress the ENT button.

The message ‘‘Default passwordsetting applied’’ is displayed for5 seconds.


Features

283

０６／０７／２６　１７：５９：４９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２８８　

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to operate the rearentertainment system, have yourdealer replace the batteries as soonas possible.

The rear control panel can bedetached from the ceiling unit andused as a remote control. To removeit from the ceiling unit, press therelease button. The control panel willswing down partway. Pivot it downfurther past the detent until itdetaches from the hinge. To reinstallit, reverse the procedure.

Battery type: BR3032


Remote Control Replacing the Remote ControlBatteries


284

COVER

RELEASE BUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１７：５９：５７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２８９　

Those packages or jackets shouldalso bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be playedin this system.

The tips on how to handle andprotect DVDs are basically the sameas those for compact discs. Refer to‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page .

There are various types of DVDsavailable. Some of them are notcompatible with your system.

The DVD player in your rearentertainment system can playDVDs and CDs bearing the abovemarks on their packages or jackets.

248

As required by the FCC: This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.


This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.


Protecting DVDs

Playable DVDsF

eatures

285

０６／０７／２６　１８：００：０５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２９０　

If you see an error message in thescreen while operating the DVDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear themessage, take your vehicle to adealer.

Message Solution

ERROR F0ERROR F2Invalid region codeInvalid disc

Parental control active.Change level to view.

Eject the disc and reinsert it.

Use a disc with the regional designation of ‘‘1’’ or ‘‘All’’.The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc, and insert a disccompatible with this system.Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental control level (seepages 280 and 281 ).

DVD Player Error Messages


286

０６／０７／２６　１８：００：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２９１　

Each headphone uses one AAAbattery. The battery is under thecover on the left earpiece. Toremove the cover, insert a coin in theslot and twist it slightly to pry thecover away from the earpiece. Pullthe cover outward, and pivot it out ofthe way.

Some state and local governmentagencies prohibit the use ofheadphones by the driver of a motorvehicle. Always obey applicable lawsand regulations.

The audio for the rear entertainmentsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones that come with thesystem. When using the headphones,make sure you wear them correctly:L (left) and R (right) are marked onthe sides of the frame. The antennasare in the front of the earpieces. Ifyou wear the headphones backwards,the antennas will be aimed awayfrom the system, affecting the soundquality and range.

To use the headphones, pivot theearpieces outward. This turns themon. To adjust the volume, turn thedial on the bottom of the rightearpiece. When you remove theheadphones, the earpiecesautomatically pivot inward, and theheadphones turn off. When not inuse, store the headphones in thepocket of either front seat.

CONTINUED

Replacing BatteriesWireless Headphones


Features

287

VOLUMEDIAL COIN

０６／０７／２６　１８：００：１８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２９２　

Auxiliary input jacks and headphoneconnectors for the rearentertainment system are under thethird seat armrest on the driver’sside. To access these connectors,open the cover by pulling up on thelever.

The system will accept auxiliaryinputs from standard video gamesand video equipment.Some video game power suppliesmay cause poor picture quality.

V = Video jackL = Left audio jackR = Right audio jack

Remove the battery. Install the newbattery in the earpiece as shown inthe diagram next to the battery slot.Slide the cover back into place on theearpiece, then press down on theback edge to lock it in place.


Auxiliary Input Jacks


288

COVER

BATTERY

LEVERARMREST AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

０６／０７／２６　１８：００：２６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２９３　

There are two headphoneconnectors for the third seatpassengers. Each connector has itsown volume control.


Features

289

HEADPHONE CONNECTORS

VOLUME DIALS

０６／０７／２６　１８：００：３０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２９４　

Once the security system is set,opening any door, the tailgate, or thehood without using the key or theremote transmitter, will cause it toalarm. It also alarms if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for 2 minutes, thenthe system resets. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and the tailgate. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors and the tailgate from theoutside with the key, driver’s locktab, door lock master switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem indicator on the instrumentpanel starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

The alarm will also be activated ifa passenger inside the lockedvehicle turns the ignition switch on.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, tailgate, or any door is notfully closed. Before you leave thevehicle, make sure the doors,tailgate, and hood are securelyclosed.

To see if the system is setafter you exit the vehicle, press theLOCK button on the remotetransmitter within 5 seconds. If thesystem is set, the horn will beeponce.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

Security System

290

NOTE:SECURITY SYSTEMINDICATOR

０６／０７／２６　１８：００：３７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２９５　

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your vehicle speedincreases going down a hill, use thebrakes to slow down. This will cancelthe cruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

1.

2.

3.Using Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Features

291

CANCELBUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

SET/DESELBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０６／０７／２６　１８：００：４５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２９６　

Resting your foot on the brake pedalcauses cruise control to cancel.

You can increase the set speed inany of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired speed, release the button.

You can decrease the set speed inany of these ways:

Even with cruise control turned on,you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set speed.

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

292

０６／０７／２６　１８：００：５４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２９７　

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system completely off and erasesthe previous set speed.

When you push the CANCEL buttonor tap the brake pedal, the systemremembers the previously set speed.To return to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorcomes on. The vehicle accelerates tothe same speed as before.

The cruise control will be canceledwhen the vehicle speed reachesabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.

Cancelling Cruise Control

Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Features

293

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１８：０１：０２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２９８　

－The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.

To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinkTransceiver for about 20 secondsuntil the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote transmitterfor the device (garage door,automatic gate, security system, etc.)has a fresh battery.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected. If your garage dooropener was manufactured before

April 1982, you may not be able toprogram HomeLink to operate it.They do not have the safety featurethat causes the motor to stop andreverse if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

On EX, EX-L and Touring models Training HomeLinkBefore you begin


General Information

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

294

０６／０７／２６　１８：０１：１１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０２９９　

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the electrical outlet.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote transmitter 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red indicator inHomeLink.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime. While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, press andrelease the remote transmitterbutton every 2 seconds.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it for about 1second.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot flash rapidly), your remotetransmitter may stoptransmitting after a short time.Go to step 4.

If the button does not work goto step 6.

If the button works,programming is complete.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot begin to flash rapidly),repeat steps 2 thru 4.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5. If the red indicator in HomeLink

begins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.

2.

3.

1.

4.

5.

CONTINUED


Features

295

０６／０７／２６　１８：０１：２２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３００　

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Find the ‘‘training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Push and hold the HomeLinkbutton for a few seconds, thenwatch the red indicator onHomeLink.

If the indicator stays on orflashes slowly, repeat steps 2thru 5.If the indicator flashes rapidlyfor 2 seconds then stays on, youhave a rolling code transmitter:go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other compatibleremotely controlled devicesaround your home (lighting,automatic gate, security system,etc.).

6.

2.

1.

3.7.

296

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem


296

TRAINING BUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１８：０１：３１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３０１　

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

If you want to retrain a programmedbutton for a new device, you do nothave to erase all button memory.You can replace the existing memorycode using this procedure:

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton to be trained until theHomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly.

If a rolling code transmitter waspreviously programmed, theindicator will flash rapidly for 2seconds, and then stay on forabout 23 seconds.

Once the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, continue tohold the HomeLink button, andfollow steps 3 thru 6 under‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page

).

If a standard transmitter wasprogrammed, the indicator willstay on for about 25 seconds.

Press the HomeLink button againfor about 1 second. It shouldoperate the garage door.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

295

Erasing Codes

Retraining a Button


Features

297

０６／０７／２６　１８：０１：４１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３０２　

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.




Customer Assistance


298

０６／０７／２６　１８：０１：４６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３０３　

All obstacles may not always besensed. Even when the system is on,you should look for obstacles nearyour vehicle to make sure it is safe topark.

Your vehicle has a parking sensorsystem. The system lets you knowthe approximate distance betweenyour vehicle and most obstacleswhile you are parking. When thesystem is on and your vehicle isnearing an obstacle, you will hear abeeper and see system messages onthe multi-information display.

To activate the system, push theswitch on the dashboard with theignition in the ON (II) position. Theindicator in the switch comes onwhen the system is on. To turn thesystem off, push the switch again.

The system has two front cornersensors, two rear corner sensors,and a rear center sensor.The rear center sensor works onlywhen the shift lever is in reverse (R),and the vehicle speed is less than 5mph (8 km/h).

The corner sensors work only whenthe shift lever is in any position otherthan P and the vehicle speed is lessthan 5 mph (8 km/h).

On Touring models

Parking Sensor System

Features

299

PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM SWITCH

０６／０７／２６　１８：０１：５２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３０４　

Example shown: Obstacle is at the left front of the vehicle

Distance

Beeper

About 16-20 in(40-50 cm)

About 12-16 in(30-40 cm)

Upper leftindicator stays on

Short beeps ContinuousbeepVery short beeps

About 12 in(30 cm) or less



Indicator

Corner Sensor OperationMulti-Information DisplayMessages and Beeper Operation


300

０６／０７／２６　１８：０２：０３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３０５　

When you turn the system on, a

appropriate indicator comes on,and a beeper sounds as shown inthe following table.

the system senses an obstacle, thebeeper will sound once. When

CONTINUED

If the system develops a problem,you will see a ‘‘CHECK PARKINGSENSOR SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display, and abeeper sounds continuously. Veryoften, a sensor covered with mud, ice,snow, etc. is the cause of thismessage. Check the sensors first. Ifthe message stays on or the beeperdoes not stop, have the systemchecked by your dealer.

Distance

Beeper Short beeps ContinuousbeepsVery short beeps

Bottomindicator stays on

About 40-70 in(1-1.8 m)

About 24-40 in(0.6-1 m)

About 24 in(0.6 m) or less



Indicator

Rear Center Sensor Operation


Features

301

０６／０７／２６　１８：０２：１１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３０６　

The range of the corner sensors andthe rear center sensor are limited.Each corner sensor is capable ofsensing an obstacle only when yourvehicle is 20 in (50 cm) or closer.The rear center sensor senses anobstacle that is behind your vehicle70 in (1.8 m) or closer.

Do not put any accessories on oraround the sensors.

The system may not functionproperly under these conditions:

The sensors are covered withsnow, ice, mud, etc.

When the vehicle is on a roughroad, on grass, or on a hill.

After the vehicle has been sittingout in hot or cold weather.

When the system is affected bysome electrical equipment ordevices generating an ultrasonicwave.

When operating the vehicle in badweather.

The system may not sense thin orlow objects, or sonic-absorptivematerials such as snow, cotton, orsponge.

The system cannot sense objectsdirectly under the bumper.

Canadian Owners:This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.


302

Within about 20 in (50 cm) Within about 70 in (1.8 m)

０６／０７／２６　１８：０２：２２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３０７　

▼▲

For the best picture, always keep therearview camera clean, and do notcover the camera lens. To avoidscratching the lens when you clean it,use a moist, soft cloth.

Whenever you shift to reverse (R)with the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the rear view is shownon the navigation system screen.

When in reverse, the touch screenand navigation system ‘‘hard’’buttons are locked out, except the‘‘ZOOM’’ button. Touching the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ button allows you to adjustthe brightness of the rearviewcamera image.

Since the rearview camera displayarea is limited, you should alwaysback up slowly and carefully, andlook behind you for obstacles.

On EX-L with navigation system andTouring models

Rearview Camera and Monitor

Features

303

The camera brightness cannot beadjusted by voice control.

０６／０７／２６　１８：０２：２８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３０８　

304

０６／０７／２６　１８：０２：３０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３０９　

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

..............................Break-in period . 306.................Fuel Recommendation . 306

.........Service Station Procedures . 307....................................Refueling . 307

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 308

...................................Oil Check . 309.............Engine Coolant Check . 310

...............................Fuel Economy . 311...Accessories and Modifications . 312

.............................Carrying Cargo . 314

Before Driving

Before

Driving

305

０６／０７／２６　１８：０２：３４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３１０　

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Do not tow a trailer.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy, metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 % ethanol byvolume and up to 15 % MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the Malfunction IndicatorLamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour dealer for service.

We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

306

０６／０７／２６　１８：０２：４５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３１１　

Before refueling, make sure the rearsliding door on the driver’s side isclosed.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle under the lower leftcorner of the dashboard.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Insert theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Refueling

Service Station Procedures

Before

Driving

307

FUEL FILL CAP

Pull

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE

TETHER

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０６／０７／２６　１８：０２：５４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３１２　

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once.

If you do not properly tighten thecap, you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay (see page ).

If you do not properly tighten thecap, you will see a ‘‘TIGHTENFUEL CAP’’ message on the multi-information display (see page

).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

eventhough the tank is not full, there maybe a problem with your vehicle’s fuelvapor recovery system. The systemhelps keep fuel vapor from goinginto the atmosphere. Try filling atanother pump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

1.

6.

5.4.

80

92

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off


On Touring models


Opening and Closing the Hood

308

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

Pull

０６／０７／２６　１８：０３：０２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３１３　

Park the vehicle on a level surface.Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the designated hole in thehood.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood. The hood latchhandle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pullthis handle until it releases thehood, then lift the hood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,or you can open the hood withoutlifting the handle, the mechanismshould be cleaned and lubricated.

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

1.

3.

2.

3.

2.

CONTINUED


Oil CheckB

eforeD

riving

309

DIPSTICK

SUPPORT ROD

GRIP

LATCH

０６／０７／２６　１８：０３：１３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３１４　

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

4.

360

364

355


Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

AddingEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant Check

Adding Engine Oil

310

MAX RESERVE TANK

MIN

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

０６／０７／２６　１８：０３：２０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３１５　

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenancemessages. See

(page ).

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use cruise control whenappropriate.

355

For example,

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Before

Driving

311

０６／０７／２６　１８：０３：２９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３１６　

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. In these areas,accessories may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

413

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

312

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０６／０７／２６　１８：０３：３７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３１７　

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety systems could make thesystems ineffective.

Seeon page .

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system.

Here are some examples:

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

37

Modifying Your Vehicle

Additional Safety Precautions

Accessories and Modifications

Before

Driving

313

０６／０７／２６　１８：０３：４４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３１８　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

In-floor storage (with LazySusan )

Glove box (upper and lower)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Roof-rack (if installed)Rear compartmentCenter pocketRemovable second row console

Rear cargo area, including thesecond row seats when removed,and the third row seat when foldedflat

Front door and seat-back pockets

: Touring models only

Carrying Cargo

314

REAR COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET

CENTERPOCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

REMOVABLE SECONDROW CONSOLE

UPPER GLOVE BOX

CARGO AREA LOWER GLOVE BOX

IN-FLOOR STORAGE(with Lazy Susan )

０６／０７／２６　１８：０３：５４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３１９　

－ ×

This figure includes, cargo,accessories, and the tongue weight ifyou are towing a trailer.

The maximum load for your vehicleis:

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit:

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 1,208lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard (Theplacard is on the driver’s doorjamb.The 1,208 lbs limit is for Touringmodels).

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from1,208 lbs.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.

For example, if the maximum load is1,208 lbs, and there will be five 150lbs passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 458 lbs[1,208 750 (5 150) = 458 lbs].

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedin the vehicle. The weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in step 4 (458 lbs in thisexample).

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, the load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle.To determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle, seepage .

1.

2.

3.

4.

LX model: 1,349 lbs (612 kg)EX model: 1,388 lbs (630 kg)EX-L model: 1,322 lbs (600 kg)Touring models: 1,208 lbs (548 kg)

5.

6.

338

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

Load LimitsB

eforeD

riving

315

０６／０７／２６　１８：０４：０３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３２０　

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the gross vehicle weightrating (GVWR) or the gross axleweight rating (GAWR). Both are ona label on the driver’s doorjamb.

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe pedals, the seat operation, orthe proper operation of thesensors under the seats.

Keep the glove boxes closed whiledriving. If either are open, apassenger could be injured duringa crash or sudden stop.

If you remove or fold the rear seatsdown, tie down items that could bethrown about the vehicle during acrash or sudden stop. Also, keep allcargo below the bottom of thewindows. If it is higher than thewindows, it could interfere with theproper operation of the side curtainairbags.

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

316

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０６／０７／２６　１８：０４：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３２１　

The grocery bag hooks on the backof the third row seats are designedto hold plastic grocery bagscontaining lightweight items. Heavyobjects may damage the hooks.

If you place items near the rearwindows, be sure they are belowthe bottom of the windows. Ifcargo is higher, it could interferewith proper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 150 lb (68 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .60

Carrying Cargo

Grocery Bag HooksCarrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Before

Driving

317

GROCERY BAG HOOKS

０６／０７／２６　１８：０４：１８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３２２　

318

０６／０７／２６　１８：０４：２０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３２３　

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the vehicle stability assistsystem, the tire pressure monitoringsystem, and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 320.......................Starting the Engine . 321

..............Automatic Transmission . 322...........................................Parking . 326

.............................Braking System . 327...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 328

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)........................................System . 330

Tire Pressure Monitoring System......................................(TPMS) . 332

...........................Towing a Trailer . 337

Driving

Driving

319

０６／０７／２６　１８：０４：２４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３２４　

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors and thetailgate are securely closed andlocked.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure (see page ).

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel, and themessages in the informationdisplay or multi-informationdisplay (depending on models)(see pages , , , and

).3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

382

172

191

144

15

65 66 7787

Preparing to Drive

320

０６／０７／２６　１８：０４：３４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３２５　

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

5.

6.1.

2.

3.

4.

146

Starting the Engine

Driving

321

Immobilizer System

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. See

on page .

０６／０７／２６　１８：０４：４１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３２６　

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from any position, pressfirmly on the brake pedal and pressthe release button on the side of theshift lever. You cannot shift out ofPark when the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position.

When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of apossible problem with thetransmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECKTRANSMISSION’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).89

On Touring models

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

322

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASE BUTTON

D3 BUTTON

０６／０７／２６　１８：０４：４９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３２７　

－

－

－This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the side of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. You must also press therelease button to shift into Park. Theshift lever must be in Park beforeyou can remove the key from theignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and press the release buttonon the side of the shift lever to shiftfrom Park to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

325

CONTINUED

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 22 to DD to NN to DR to ND to DD to D

Do this:Press the brake pedal, andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

Press the D button.

3

3

3

3

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Neutral (N)

Reverse (R)


Driving

323

０６／０７／２６　１８：０４：５７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３２８　

－－

－

－

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use second gear:For more power when climbing.To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.When driving downhill with atrailer.

Use this position fornormal driving. The transmissionautomatically selects a suitable gearfor your speed and acceleration.

To use D , press theD button when the shift lever is inthe ‘‘D’’ position. This position is simi-lar to D, except only the first threegears are selected instead of all five.Use D when towing a trailer in hillyterrain, or to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. D canalso keep the transmission fromcycling between third and fourthgears in stop-and-go driving.

To shift from second tofirst, press the release button on theside of the shift lever. This positionlocks the transmission in first gear.By upshifting and downshiftingthrough 1, 2, D , and D, you canoperate the transmission much like amanual transmission without aclutch pedal.

33

3

3

3


Engine Speed Limiter

Second (2)Drive (D)

Drive (D )

First (1)

3

324

０６／０７／２６　１８：０５：０５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３２９　

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Set the parking brake.

Put a cloth on the notch of theshift lock release slot cover. Usinga small flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the notch of the cover toremove it.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to neutral.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the left side. Press thebrake pedal, and restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

5.

6.4.

1.

2.

3.


Shift Lock ReleaseD

riving

325

０６／０７／２６　１８：０５：１４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３３０　

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Lock the doors and the tailgate.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Turn off the lights.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Parking Tips

Parking

326

０６／０７／２６　１８：０５：２４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３３１　

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalapplies the brakes slightly. Thisbuilds up heat, and reduces brakeeffectiveness and brake pad life. Inaddition, fuel economy can bereduced. It also keeps your brakelights on all the time, confusingdrivers behind you.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious and alert in your driving.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Braking System

Braking System Design

Brake Wear IndicatorsD

riving

327

０６／０７／２６　１８：０５：３１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３３２　

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

89You should never pump the brake pedal.

On Touring models

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS Indicator

328

０６／０７／２６　１８：０５：３８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３３３　

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

If this happens, you will also see‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ and‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’messages on the multi-informationdisplay.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

411

On Touring models

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Driving

329

０６／０７／２６　１８：０５：４６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３３４　

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output,and by selectively applying thebrakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink (seepage ).

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the VSA system indicator comeson while driving, pull to the side ofthe road when it is safe, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

Without VSA, your vehicle still hasnormal braking and cornering ability,but it does not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

If the low tire pressure indicatorcomes on (see page ), or themulti-information display shows a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message(see page ), the VSA systemautomatically turns on even if youturn it off with the VSA OFF switch.

70

71

88

On Touring models onlyVSA Activation Indicator

VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

330

０６／０７／２６　１８：０５：５５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３３５　

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the VSA system onand off.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

386

VSA and Tire SizesVSA Off Switch

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Driving

331

EX-L andTouring models

VSA OFFSWITCH

LX and EX models

VSA OFF SWITCH

０６／０７／２６　１８：０６：０８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３３６　

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the vehicleplacard and in the owner’s manual(see page ).

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator to come on.

After inflating the tire(s) to theproper pressure, the indicator willremain on until the vehicle is drivenat a speed more than 25 mph (40 km/h).

With this indicator on, you will seewhich tire is losing pressure on themulti-information display along witha ��CHECKTIRE PRESSURE��message (see page ).

383

334

On Touring models

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire PressureIndicator

332

０６／０７／２６　１８：０６：１７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３３７　

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

After you replace the flat tire withthe spare, the low tire pressureindicator stays on. This is normal;the system is not monitoring thespare tire pressure. Manually checkthe spare tire pressure to be sure itis correct.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you have a flat tire, the low tireindicator and tire pressure monitorwill come on. Replace the indicatedflat tire with the compact spare tire(see page ).

382

396

396





Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Changing a Tire with TPMS

Driving

333

０６／０７／２６　１８：０６：２７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３３８　

When all tire pressures are normal,the tire pressure monitor will show a‘‘TIRE PRESS. OK SYSTEM FUNCNORMAL’’ message.

To display the tire pressure monitor,press the INFO button until itappears on the multi-informationdisplay.

When the TPMS is functioningnormally, you can see the tirepressure readings of each tire in psi(U.S. models) or kPa (Canadianmodels) by pressing the SEL/RESET button while the multi-information display shows the tirepressure monitor.

When any of the tires have lowpressure, the low tire pressureindicator on the instrument panelcomes on, and the multi-informationdisplay also interrupts the currentdisplay and shows a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message. You can seeone or more of the low pressure tirepositions highlighted in the displayalong with this message.

On Touring models


Tire Pressure Monitor

334

U. S. model is shown.

０６／０７／２６　１８：０６：３４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３３９　

It is possible that the pressuresshown on the multi-informationdisplay and the pressures youmanually measure are slightlydifferent.If the difference is significant or youcannot make the low tire pressureindicator and message on the multi-information display go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

If a flat tire is causing the low tirepressure indicator to come on, youwill see the above message on themulti-information display.

Because your vehicle is equippedwith the Michelin PAX system, youcan continue to drive up to about 125miles (200 km). If you have a flat tire,take your vehicle to the nearestHonda dealer or authorized MichelinPAX system dealer.

The tires on your vehicles are PAXtires, and you cannot replace orrepair a flat tire. Replacement orrepair of tires must be performed bya Honda dealer or an authorizedMichelin PAX system dealer.

For more information on theMichelin PAX system, refer to page

.392

On U. S. Touring model onlyPax System Warning

Changing a Tire with TPMS


Driving

335

０６／０７／２６　１８：０６：４１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３４０　




On Touring models

If there is a problem with the TPMS,the multi-information display showsa ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message.

If you see this message, the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. Also,the tire pressure readings will not bedisplayed. Have your vehiclechecked by a dealer as soon aspossible.

If the low tire pressure indicatorcomes on, or the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message, the VSA systemautomatically turns on even whenthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

331

Check TPMS System Message


336

０６／０７／２６　１８：０６：４８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３４１　

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can also use it totow a trailer if you carefully observethe load limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everything in or on itdepends on several factors. See page

for the driving limits for yourtowing situation. Towing a load thatis too heavy can seriously affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance.It can also damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight that thetongue of a fully-loaded trailer putson the hitch should be approximately10 % of the total trailer weight. Toomuch tongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

338

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Towing a Trailer

Driving

337

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

０６／０７／２６　１８：０６：５５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３４２　

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊＊

Maximum Total Trailer WeightNumber ofOccupants

12345678

Equipped with transmission coolerand power steering fluid cooler

3,500 lbs (1,580 kg)3,350 lbs (1,520 kg)3,200 lbs (1,450 kg)3,050 lbs (1,380 kg)2,900 lbs (1,310 kg)2,750 lbs (1,250 kg)

2,600 lbs (1,180 kg) 1,550 lbs (700 kg)650 lbs (290 kg)

Including driver. Based on 150 lbs (70 kg)per occupant.See page for information about fluidcoolers.

1:

2:

3:4:

LX, EX and EX-L modelsTouring model

340

1

3

2

3 4

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 % of the loadtoward the front of the trailer and40 % toward the rear, then re-adjustthe load as needed.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,and the tongue load is 5,952 lbs(2,700 kg).

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,and the tongue load must notexceed:

2,833 lbs (1,285 kg) on the front axle,and 3,197 lbs (1,450 kg) on the rearaxle.

2,877 lbs (1,305 kg) on the front axle,and 3,197 lbs (1,450 kg) on the rearaxle.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe fully loaded vehicle and trailer is8,410 lbs (3,815 kg).

On U.S. Touring model

On all models except U.S. Touring

Towing a Trailer

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR):

338

０６／０７／２６　１８：０７：０３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３４３　

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale. For publicscales in your area, check your localphone book, or contact your trailerdealer or rental agency forassistance.

If you cannot get to a public scale,you can estimate the total trailerweight by adding the weight of yourtrailer (as quoted by themanufacturer) with everything in oron the trailer.

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment,depending on the size of your trailer,how much load you are towing, andwhere you tow. To ensure the bestquality, we recommend that youpurchase Honda equipmentwhenever possible.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in this section. Also makesure that all equipment is properlyinstalled and meets federal, state,province, and local regulations.

If you normally pull the same loadeach time you tow a trailer, you canuse a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge to check thetongue load the first time you set upa towing combination (a fully loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

CONTINUED

Checking Loads Towing Equipment andAccessories

Towing a Trailer

Driving

339

０６／０７／２６　１８：０７：０９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３４４　

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody,using the six threaded holesprovided. A hitch and the requiredfluid coolers designed especially foryour Odyssey can be obtained fromyour Honda dealer.

If the total trailer weight is morethan 1,850 lbs (840 kg), you mustalso use a weight distributing hitch.This device transfers weight fromthe vehicle’s rear wheels to the frontwheels, and to the trailer’s wheels.Carefully follow the hitch maker’sinstructions for proper installationand adjustment.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

If the total trailer weight exceeds2,000 lbs (900 kg), you should installa sway control device to minimizeswaying that can occur in crosswindsand in normal and emergencydriving maneuvers. Your trailermaker can tell you what kind of swaycontrol you need and how to install it.

To help prevent overheating, atransmission fluid cooler and apower steering fluid cooler arerequired for trailer towing. Thesecoolers are available only from yourHonda dealer.

Towing a Trailer

Hitches

Weight Distributing Hitch

Safety Chains Sway Control

Transmission Fluid Cooler andPower Steering Fluid Cooler

340

０６／０７／２６　１８：０７：１７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３４５　

＋＋

CONTINUED

Honda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicles hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,and local regulations. Check therequirements for the areas whereyou plan to tow, and use onlyequipment designed for your vehicle.

Your vehicle has a trailer lightingconnector behind the right sidepanel in the cargo area. Refer to thedrawing above for the purpose ofeach pin.

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Brakes Trailer LightsD

riving

341

GROUND

SMALL LIGHTS

LEFT TURN SIGNAL

RIGHT TURNSIGNAL

SMALL LIGHTS

B HACB HAZARD

０６／０７／２６　１８：０７：２５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３４６　

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

When towing a trailer, werecommend that you carry a full-sizespare wheel and tire for your vehicleand trailer. If you use the compactspare tire that came with yourvehicle, it could adversely affectvehicle handling. See page forproper tire size, page for how tostore a full size wheel and tire, andpage for information onchanging a flat tire.

Remember to unhitch the trailerbefore changing a flat. Ask yourtrailer sales or rental agency whereand how to store the trailer’s sparetire.

Because of the Michelin PAX system,you must not change a flat tire, oruse a compact spare tire on yourvehicle.

Many states and provinces requirespecial outside mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

386401

396

U.S. Touring model

Towing a Trailer

Spare Tires Additional Towing Equipment

342

０６／０７／２６　１８：０７：３２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３４７　

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated, and the trailertires and spare are inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.Use the D position when towing atrailer on level roads. Do not exceed55 mph (88 km/h). At higher speeds,the trailer may sway or affect vehiclehandling.

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the suspension,cooling system, and lights are ingood operating condition.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

You may want to fill the fuel tankwith premium fuel. Premium fuelprovides improved performance.

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

Pre-Tow Checklist Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving

343

０６／０７／２６　１８：０７：４４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３４８　

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including putting thetransmission in Park and firmlysetting the parking brake. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer’stires.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to secondgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

3

bottom

Towing a Trailer

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Backing Up

Parking

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

344

０６／０７／２６　１８：０７：５４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３４９　

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display or multi-information display (depending onmodels), a maintenance record, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 346....................Maintenance Minder . 347....................Maintenance Record . 357

..............................Fluid Locations . 359........................Adding Engine Oil . 360

.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 362..............................Engine Coolant . 364

....................Windshield Washers . 366....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 367

....................................Brake Fluid . 369....................Power Steering Fluid . 370

....................................Timing Belt . 370.............................................Lights . 371

................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 378.....................................Floor Mats . 378

.................................Wiper Blades . 379...............................................Tires . 382

...................Checking the Battery . 389.............................Vehicle Storage . 390

441

Maintenance

Maintenance

345

０６／０７／２６　１８：０７：５８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３５０　

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Maintenance Safety


Injury from moving parts.

Burns from hot parts.

Carbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

346

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

０６／０７／２６　１８：０８：０９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３５１　

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display (LX, EX andEX-L models), or on the multi-information display (Touringmodels), to show you when youshould have your dealer performengine oil replacement and indicatedmaintenance service.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage. To see the current engine oil life,

turn the ignition switch to ON (II),and push and release the Select/Reset knob on the instrument panelrepeatedly, until the engine oil life isdisplayed.

If the oil life is 15 percent or less,you will see the oil life indicator forevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Thisindicator stays on until you cancel itby pressing the Select/Reset knob.The maintenance minder indicatorwill also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednext to the engine oil life indicator.

CONTINUED


Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life IndicatorM

aintenance

347

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR

０６／０７／２６　１８：０８：１６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３５２　

When the remaining engine oil life isless than 5 percent, you will see a‘‘CHANGE OIL’’ message on theinformation display, along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, you will see the abovedisplay. In this display, the remainingoil life indicator will be blinking. Thisdisplay comes on and stays on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position. When you seethis message, have the indicatedmaintenance performed by yourdealer as soon as possible.

You can change the display to theodometer, the trip meter, or theoutside temperature by pushing theSelect/Reset knob on the instrumentpanel.

Maintenance Minder

348

０６／０７／２６　１８：０８：２２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３５３　

－

CONTINUED

When the remaining engine oil life is15 percent or less, the display showsa ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ messagealong with the maintenance itemcode(s) for other scheduledmaintenance items needing service.

If you still do not perform theindicated maintenance, you will see anegative mileage, for example‘‘ 543,’’ blinking in the display. Thisnegative mileage means that youshould have performed the indicatedmaintenance 543 miles ago.Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the systemmessage indicator will also come on.

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, then push and releasethe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly, until theengine oil life is displayed.

On Touring models

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

349

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

０６／０７／２６　１８：０８：２９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３５４　

These messages will come on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on page .

You can change the display to theodometer, the trip meter, or theoutside temperature by pushing theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel.

When the remaining engine oil life isless than 0 percent and you have notdone the required maintenance, youwill see the above display for severalseconds. In this display, ‘‘0’’ will beblinking.

The display then changes to‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE.’’

When the remaining engine oil life isless than 5 percent, you will see theabove display. The display thenchanges to ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW.’’Have the indicated maintenancedone as soon as possible.

353

Maintenance Minder

350

０６／０７／２６　１８：０８：３７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３５５　

－All the maintenance items displayedon the information display or themulti-information display are in code.

If you still do not get the indicatedmaintenance done, you will see anegative mileage, for example ‘‘ 15’’blinking. This negative mileagedisplay means you should have donethe indicated maintenance 15 milesago. Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

For an explanation of themaintenance codes, see page .356

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Maintenance

351

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCESUB ITEMS

MAINTENANCESUB ITEMS

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

LX, EX, and EX-L models Touring models

０６／０７／２６　１８：０８：４６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３５６　

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.


If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Press the Select/Reset knob untilthe engine oil life indicator isdisplayed.

Press the Select/Reset knob forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife indicator and the maintenanceitem code(s) will blink.

Press the Select/Reset knob formore than 5 seconds. Themaintenance items code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifeindicator will reset to ‘‘100.’’

3. 4.

1.

2.


Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeIndicator

352

０６／０７／２６　１８：０８：５４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３５７　


Press the SEL/RESET button onthe steering wheel. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

If you want to cancel resetting,press the INFO button on thesteering wheel. The displaychanges as shown. Press the SEL/RESET button. This cancels theresetting procedure, and thescreen returns to the normaldisplay mode.

Press the SEL/RESET button onthe steering wheel for about 10seconds. The display will changeto the ‘‘CUSTOM SETUP’’ mode.

Press the SEL/RESET button onthe steering wheel until you seethe engine oil life display.

3.

1.

2.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

On Touring models

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

353

０６／０７／２６　１８：０９：０２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３５８　

We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

When you select ‘‘RESET’’ andpress the SEL/RESET button, themulti-information display resets asshown above.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out themaintenance record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.6.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

354

０６／０７／２６　１８：０９：０８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３５９　

－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

U.S. Vehicles:You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by the odometer/trip meter display or the multi-information display.

309

310

367

369

384

371

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

355

０６／０７／２６　１８：０９：１７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３６０　

－－

＃

＊

＊

＃

＃

＊

Maintenance Minder

356

:

If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 monthsafter the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-informationdisplay, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

NOTE:

:

355

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replaceevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds or trailer towing results in highertransmission temperatures.This requires transmission fluid changes morefrequently than recommended by the MaintenanceMinder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under theseconditions, have the transmission fluid changedevery 30,000 miles (48,000 km).

Replace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pump

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under 20°F,

29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km(Canada).

Inspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

AB

Symbol Symbol12

3

4

5

Main

tenance

Min

der

０６／０７／２６　１８：０９：２５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３６１　

Maintenance Record

Maintenance

357

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.

０６／０７／２６　１８：０９：３２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３６２　

Maintenance Record

358

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

０６／０７／２６　１８：０９：３７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３６３　

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

359

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

RADIATOR CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

POWER STEERINGFLUID(Red cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

０６／０７／２６　１８：０９：４１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３６４　

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Adding Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil

360

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

０６／０７／２６　１８：０９：４８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３６５　

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the odometer/trip meter display or on the multi-information display.

Your vehicle’s engine does notrequire any oil additives. Additivesmay adversely affect engine ortransmission performance anddurability.

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

Adding Engine Oil

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Maintenance

361

Ambient Temperature

０６／０７／２６　１８：０９：５４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３６６　

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the odometer/trip meter display or on the multi-information display. The oil and filtercollect contaminants that can dam-age your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledtechnician.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Check the oil filter to make sureits gasket did not stick to the filterbase. A stuck gasket could causean oil leak.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Changing the Oil and Filter

362

WASHER

DRAIN BOLTOIL FILTER

０６／０７／２６　１８：１０：０２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３６７　

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Changing the Oil and Filter

Maintenance

363

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１０：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３６８　

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

364

RESERVE TANKMAX

MIN

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１０：１６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３６９　

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill. Cleanup any spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

365

RADIATOR CAP

FILLER NECK

Fill up to here

０６／０７／２６　１８：１０：２５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３７０　

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use. Thisreservoir supplies the windshield andrear window washers.

Check the fluid level by removingthe cap and looking at the levelgauge attached to the cap.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).

You will also see a ‘‘WASHERFLUID LOW’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

73

89

On Canadian models:

On Canadian Touring model:

Windshield Washers

366

LEVEL GAUGE

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１０：３２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３７１　

CONTINUED

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is indicated on a maintenancemessage on the information displayor on the multi-information display(depending on models).

If you are not sure how to add fluidor you do not have the properequipment to reach the transmissionfluid fill hole, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledtechnician.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick, and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator fan comes on, thenshut off the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 secondsbefore going to step 2, but don’twait longer than 90 seconds.

1.

2. 3.

4.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

367

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARKHOTMARK

０６／０７／２６　１８：１０：４２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３７２　

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug, thenadd the fluid into the fill hole tobring it to the level between theupper and lower marks on thedipstick.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). If it’snot available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed and refilledwith Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it isconvenient.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration on the previous page.

5.

6.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

368

FILL PLUG

０６／０７／２６　１８：１０：４７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３７３　

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Replace the brake fluid every 3 years,independent of mileage.

Brake Fluid

Maintenance

369

MAX

MIN

０６／０７／２６　１８：１０：５３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３７４　

－－

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Replace the belt at 60,000 miles(100,000 km) if you regularly driveyour vehicle in one or more of theseconditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

The timing belt should be replacedat the intervals shown in themaintenance minder schedule.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillimmediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Power Steering Fluid Timing Belt

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

370

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１１：０２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３７５　

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs, two on each side. Whenreplacing a bulb, handle it by its baseand protect the glass from contactwith your skin or hard objects. If youtouch the glass, clean it withdenatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

The high beam headlight bulb andthe low beam headlight bulb arereplaced the same way.

Open the hood. To change thehigh beam headlight bulb on thepassenger’s side, remove thepower steering fluid reservoirfrom its holder by pulling itstraight up.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or other qualified technician.

1.

CONTINUED

Lights

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight BulbM

aintenance

371

POWERSTEERINGFLUIDRESERVOIR

Passenger’s side

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１１：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３７６　

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Open the hood. Remove thesocket from the headlightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Pull the burned out bulb straightout of its socket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

If you replaced the high beamheadlight bulb on the passenger’sside, reinstall the power steeringfluid reservoir.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

5.

6.

7.

2.

3.

4.2.

1.

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn SignalBulb

372

TAB

BULB

CONNECTOR

BULB SOCKET

Driver’s side

０６／０７／２６　１８：１１：２０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３７７　

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Open the hood. Remove thesocket from the headlightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.


3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Lights

Replacing a Front Parking/SideMarker Bulb

Maintenance

373

BULB SOCKET

０６／０７／２６　１８：１１：２８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３７８　

Remove the fog light assemblyfrom the bumper by pulling itsinner edge first, then the wholeassembly out of the bumper.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb from the foglight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb.

Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

Insert the new bulb into theassembly and turn it one-quarterturn clockwise to lock it in place.

Remove the undercover boltlocated under the front bumper.

Push up the undercover.

Reinstall the fog light assemblyinto the bumper. Tighten theundercover bolt.

1.

6.

7.

8.

2.

3.

4.

5.

9.

Touring models only

Lights

Replacing a Fog Light Bulb

374

HOLEBOLT

UNDERCOVER

TAB

BULBCONNECTOR

０６／０７／２６　１８：１１：３９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３７９　

Open the tailgate.

Install the rear light assembly inthe rear pillar. Tighten the twobolts. Snap the bolt covers intoposition.

Put the socket back into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Remove the two bolt covers on therear pillar by prying on the bottomedge with a flat-tip screwdriver.Remove the bolts with a Phillips-head screwdriver, and remove thelight assembly from the rear pillar.

Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its socket.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: turn signal orbrake/taillight.2.

3.

5.

6.

1.

4.

7.

8.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs (in RearPillar)

Maintenance

375

COVER

BOLTS

BULBS

SOCKETS

０６／０７／２６　１８：１１：５０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３８０　

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the light assemblycover. Remove the cover bycarefully prying in the notch on itsmiddle edge with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: taillight or back-uplight.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.



Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Reinstall the light assembly cover.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

7.

6.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Tailgate)

376

COVER

BULBS

SOCKETS

０６／０７／２６　１８：１２：００　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３８１　

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Remove the two screw covers onthe light assembly by prying onthe side edge with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

Remove the screws with a Phillips-head screwdriver, then removethe light assembly from thetailgate.


Press the brake pedal to makesure the new bulb is working.

Put the socket back into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Reinstall the high-mount brakelight assembly into the tailgate.Tighten the two screws andreinstall the covers.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Maintenance

377

SCREWS

BULB

SOCKETCOVER

０６／０７／２６　１８：１２：０９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３８２　

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

The driver’s floor mat that camewith your vehicle hooks over thefloor mat anchors. This keeps thefloor mat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mat.

Floor MatsCleaning the Seat Belts

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

378

LOOP

０６／０７／２６　１８：１２：１６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３８３　

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, and areasthat are getting hard or if they leavestreaks and unwiped areas whenused.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.Front windshield: Raise the driver’sside first, then the passenger’sside.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

2.1. Front Wiper:

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

379

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the arms.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１２：２３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３８４　

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Pull one end of the blade out fromthe holder.Slide the blade out of the holder.

Disconnect the blade assembly fromthe wiper arm by pivoting the bladeassembly upward.

Rear Wiper : Front Wiper : Rear Wiper :3.

Wiper Blades

380

BLADE

０６／０７／２６　１８：１２：３０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３８５　

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Lower the wiper arm against thewindshield.Front windshield: Lower thepassenger’s side first, then thedriver’s side.

Insert both ends of the blade into theholder. Make sure they are secure.

Slide the new blade into the wiperarm. Make sure it is engaged in theslot along its full length.

Install the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

6.

7.

4.

5. Front Wiper :

Rear Wiper :

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

381

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

０６／０７／２６　１８：１２：３８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３８６　

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) will warn you when a tirepressure is low. See page forinformation on the TPMS.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

332

If equipped

Tires

Inflation GuidelinesTiresWheels

382

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１２：４７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３８７　

CONTINUED

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures.

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should use your own tirepressure gauge whenever you checkyour tire pressures. This will make iteasier for you to tell if a pressureloss is due to a tire problem and notdue to a variation between gauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

Tire Size

Tire Size

Cold Tire Pressure forNormal Driving

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Cold Tire Pressure forNormal Driving

LX and EX models

EX-L and Canadian Touring models

Tires

Recommended Tire PressuresM

aintenance

383

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

235/65R16 103T35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

33 psi (230 kPa ,2.3 kgf/cm )

235/65R16 103T35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

０６／０７／２６　１８：１２：５９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３８８　

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure forNormal Driving

Front:

Rear:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadleft on the tire.

428

U.S. Touring model

Tires

Tire Inspection

384

INDICATORLOCATIONMARKS

TREAD WEARINDICATORS

235-710R460A104T

33 psi (230 kPa ,2.3 kgf/cm )35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

０６／０７／２６　１８：１３：１５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３８９　

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system toactivate.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display or multi-information display (depending onmodels). Move the tires to thepositions shown in the diagram eachtime they are rotated. If youpurchase directional tires, rotateonly front-to-back.

CONTINUED

If equipped

Tires

Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and WheelsM

aintenance

385

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly genuine Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１３：２５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３９０　

＋It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure the new one matches thespecifications of the original.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Wheels:

Tires:

426

428

All models except U.S. Touring

U.S. Touring model


U.S. Touring model

Tires

Wheel and Tire Specifications Winter Driving

Snow Tires

386

16 x 7J

225 x 460A

235/65R16 103T

235-710R460A 104T

(TPMS)

(TPMS&PAX)

(PAX)

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１３：３７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３９１　

＃

CONTINUED

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow.

Tire chains cannot be used with aflat front tire. If a front tire goes flatwhen a tire chain is installed on it,remove the chain, and follow theprecautions described underMichelin PAX System (see page

).

The previously listed chains are theonly ones that have been approvedby Honda for use on your vehicle.Since Honda cannot test all chains,you must be personally responsiblefor proper selection, installation, anduse of tire chains.

These chains are available at manyauto supply stores. For a completelist of stores, visit the SCC website atwww.scc-chain.com. When installingchains, follow the manufacturer’sinstructions, and mount them astightly as you can. Drive slowly withchains installed.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1142Cable-type: SCC SC Cable SC1042

Link-type: Laclede 1142Cable-type: SCC SC Cable SC1042

392

All except U.S. Touring model

U.S. Touring model

Tires

Tire ChainsM

aintenance

387

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１３：４５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３９２　

If you must continue driving with aflat tire, follow all the proceduresand precautions described on page

.

Never use a tire repair agent in aPAX system tire, and never repaira PAX system tire by yourself.Repair or replacement must bedone by a Honda dealer or anauthorized Michelin PAX systemdealer.

Do not replace the PAX system tiresand wheels with conventional tiresand wheels. Doing so would disablethe PAX system and the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS),and may void your new vehiclewarranty.

If you ever hear the chainscontacting the body or chassis, stopand investigate. If the chains haveloosened, retighten them. Make surethey do not contact the brake linesor suspension.

Remove the chains as soon as youbegin driving on cleared roads.

The tires and wheels on your vehicleare specially designed for the PAXsystem, and the PAX system isspecifically designed and fine-tunedfor your vehicle.

Because of these reasons, use onlythe wheels and tires designated inthis owner’s manual. Never mix PAXsystem wheels or tires withconventional wheels or tires.

There are no snow tires compatiblewith the PAX system, and not all tirechains are suitable for use on thePAX system tires. To prevent tirechain damage to the PAX systemtires or wheels, ensure that no partof the chain contacts the PAXsystem.

If you mount snow chains on yourtires, use the chains recommendedby Honda (see page ).

Your vehicle is equipped with theMichelin PAX system which,together with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS), enablesyou to continue driving even if one ormore of your tires loses its pressure.

387

392

On U.S. Touring model only

Important Precautions

Tires

Michelin PAX System

388

０６／０７／２６　１８：１３：５４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３９３　

－

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

Maintenance

389

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１４：０１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３９４　

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle twice).Preferably, do this once a month.

Vehicle Storage

390

０６／０７／２６　１８：１４：１１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３９５　

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

...............Driving with a Flat Tire . 392..............Michelin PAX System . 392

......................Compact Spare Tire . 395....................Changing a Flat Tire . 396

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 403................................Jump Starting . 405

..............If the Engine Overheats . 407.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 409..........Charging System Indicator . 409

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 410...........................Readiness Codes . 410

...............Brake System Indicator . 411..............................................Fuses . 412

..............................Fuse Locations . 415......................Emergency Towing . 418

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

391

０６／０７／２６　１８：１４：１４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３９６　

Your vehicle is equipped with theMichelin PAX system. Since eachMichelin PAX system tire has aninner support ring that allows it tocontinue running without air, it maybe difficult to immediately judgefrom its appearance if a tire ispunctured. Your vehicle is alsoequipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS), and thissystem may be your first detection ofa flat tire. The TPMS monitors the air pressure

of all four tires whenever the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Itwill immediately sense if a tire startsto lose its pressure, and give youwarning with the low tire pressureindicator in the instrument panel anda ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. If the indicator and thewarning message do not come onagain after you inflate the tire to itscorrect air pressure (see page ),

it was probably a natural loss of theair pressure and you can continuedriving as before.

If the indicator and the messagecome on again, you probably have aflat tire. In this case, you will see a‘‘PAX SYSTEM WARNING’’message on the multi-informationdisplay.

384

On U.S. Touring models only

Driving With a Flat Tire

Michelin PAX System

392

０６／０７／２６　１８：１４：２０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３９７　

With the PAX system tires, you candrive up to about 125 miles (200 km)even if one or more of your tires arepunctured. This allows you to driveto the nearest Honda dealer orauthorized Michelin PAX systemdealer to have the tire(s) repaired.

If you get a flat tire, never try torepair it yourself, and never replace aflat tire with a compact spare tire.

The above message shows that youare driving your vehicle on a flat tire,and should observe the ‘‘RUN FLATDRIVING’’ speed limit of 50 mph(80 km/h). Drive to your nearestHonda dealer or authorized MichelinPAX system dealer, or call the PAXhelp hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE(1-877-729-8473).

If the display changes to the abovemessage, it means that ‘‘RUN FLATDRIVING’’ is nearing the limit, andyou have to stop driving soon. Takeyour vehicle to the nearest Hondadealer or authorized Michelin PAXsystem dealer as soon as possible.

Follow the instructions shown on themulti-information display, and drivevery carefully.

CONTINUED


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

393

０６／０７／２６　１８：１４：２７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３９８　

If you see the above message on themulti-information display, you havereached the limit of run flat driving,and you should stop drivingimmediately. Be aware that if youcontinue to drive, the noise andvibration level from the tire willincrease significantly, and the tiremay no longer be repairable.

Stop driving immediately whenyou see a ‘‘RUN FLAT LIMITSTOP DRIVING’’ message on themulti-information display.Continuous driving after thismessage will make it impossible torepair the tire.

If you cannot find a Honda dealer oran authorized Michelin PAX systemdealer where you are driving, call thePAX help hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE(1-877-729-8473).

Call a professional towing servicewho can transport your vehicle onflat-bed equipment. Never tow your

vehicle behind another vehicle with arope or chain. Flat-bed equipment isthe best way to transport yourvehicle. Your vehicle can also betowed by wheel-lift equipment withthe wheels off the ground (see page

).

Although your vehicle is capable ofrun flat driving, you should alwaysobserve the following:

Do not drive faster than 50 mph(80 km/h).

Drive carefully. Your vehicle mayhandle differently from when thetires are properly inflated,especially when cornering.

In its run flat mode, a PAX systemtire is somewhat noisier than whenit is fully inflated, this is normal.

418



394

０６／０７／２６　１８：１４：３５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０３９９　

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

Follow these precautions:


Compact Spare Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

395

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０６／０７／２６　１８：１４：４４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４００　

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.If you are towing a trailer, unhitchit.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

The jack is behind a cover in thecargo area on the driver’s side,and tools are on the back of thecover. Remove the cover bypushing the tabs down and pullingthe cover out.

Open the tailgate.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

2.

1.

3.


Changing a Flat Tire

396

JACK

SPARE TIRE

TOOLS

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１４：５１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４０１　

CONTINUED

Loosen the jack from its holder byturning the end counterclockwise.

Remove the bracket from the jackstorage area by unscrewing thebracket mounting wing bolt.Remove the vinyl storage bag.

Move the seat belt out of the wayby hanging the latch plate on theholder.

Fold down the third seat (see page).

6.

7.

5.4.

182


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

397

BRACKETVINYL BAGJACK COVER

BRACKET MOUNTINGWING BOLT

HOLDER

０６／０７／２６　１８：１５：００　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４０２　

The spare tire is stored behind the spare tire cover on the sidewall ofthe cargo area on the driver�s side.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Remove the cover by holding thetwo handles on the spare tirecover and pulling the cover out.

If you are changing a rear tire,close the sliding door.

Make sure you also turn off thesliding door main switch.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Unscrew the tire mounting wingbolt, and take the spare tire out ofits holder.

8.

9.

10. 12.

11.

On EX, EX-L and Canadian Touringmodels


398

WHEEL NUTSSEAT BELT

COVERTIRE MOUNTINGWING BOLT

SPACER CONE

０６／０７／２６　１８：１５：０９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４０３　

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriver orother tool. The wheel cover cannotbe removed without first removingthe wheel nuts.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

13. 14. 15.

CONTINUED

On LX model


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

399

EXTENSION WHEEL COVER

HUBWHEEL NUTWRENCH

０６／０７／２６　１８：１５：１７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４０４　

Tighten the wheel nuts securely ina crisscross pattern. Have thewheel nut torque checked at thenearest automotive service facility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Put the flat tire in the suppliedvinyl storage bag.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

16.

17.

18. 19.


400

94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)

０６／０７／２６　１８：１５：２４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４０５　

CONTINUED

Install the bracket and the bracketmounting wing bolt on theattachment point as shown, andtighten the bolt. Make sure thebracket is securely tightened.

Install the flat tire on the bracketwith the inside of the wheel facingtoward you. Install the tiremounting wing bolt to the bracketthrough one of the five wheel nutholes as shown. Poke a hole in thevinyl bag as needed. Secure theflat tire by tightening the tiremounting wing bolt.

Store the jack in its holder. Tostore the jack, align the locatorstud in the holder with the hole inthe jack base. Turn the jack’s endbracket clockwise to lock it inplace. Store the tools in theholders on the back of the jackstorage cover.

Return the third seat to an uprightposition.

You will find a U-shaped carpetpiece behind the seat bottom ofthe third row seat. Pull up the U-shaped carpet piece, fold it, andtack the end under the carpet.Remove the spacer, and unfastenthe plastic screw with a coin.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

401

BRACKET

TIRE MOUNTING WING BOLTSPACER

PLASTIC SCREWBRACKET MOUNTING WING BOLT

ATTACHMENTPOINT

０６／０７／２６　１８：１５：３３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４０６　

You can store the flat tire on the topof the folded third seat.

Pull up the U-shaped carpet piece,fold it, and tack the end under thecarpet.

Remove the spacer, and unfastenthe plastic screw with a coin.

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire.

Store the spacer, plastic screw andcenter cap in a noticeable place.

Place the flat tire face down on theattachment point. Put the spacercone on the flat tire as shown.Poke holes in the vinyl bag. Securethe flat tire into the attachmentpoint by tightening the tiremounting wing bolt through thecenter cap hole of the flat tirewheel.

Follow step 22 through 26 onpages and .

Store the spacer and the plasticscrew in a noticeable place.

Make sure to reinstall the plasticscrew after the flat tire is repairedand installed on the vehicle.

Store the wheel cover in the sparetire storage area.

Install the spare tire storage cover.

1.

2.

25.

26.

27.3.

4.

5.401 402

On EX, EX-L and Canadian Touringmodels

On LX model

Storing a Flat Tire on the FoldedThird Seat


402

PLASTIC SCREW

TIRE MOUNTINGWING BOLT

ATTACHING POINT SPACER CONE

SPACER

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１５：４４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４０７　

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .405

418

405

389

Emergency Towing

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

If the Engine Won’t Start

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

403

０６／０７／２６　１８：１５：５３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４０８　

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .321

146

413

418Emergency

Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

If the Engine Won’t Start

404

０６／０７／２６　１８：１６：００　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４０９　

CONTINUED

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, audio system, lights, etc.Put the transmission in neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

The numbers in the illustrationshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

1.

2.

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

405

BOOSTERBATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１６：０９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４１０　

－＋

＋

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,and then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the engine hanger asshown. Do not connect this jumpercable to any other part of theengine.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourvehicle’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

4.

6.

7.

5.

3.

Jump Starting

406

０６／０７／２６　１８：１６：１６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４１１　

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

If the Engine Overheats

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

407

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１６：２５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４１２　

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat (climate control toAUTO at ‘‘ ’’). Add coolantto the radiator up to the base ofthe filler neck. If you do not havethe proper coolant mixtureavailable, you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

5.

6.

7.8.

9.

10.

11.

418

418

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Overheats

408

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１６：３３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４１３　

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKCHARGING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

3.

4.

88

309

360

418

88

On Touring models

On Touring models

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

409

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１６：４３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４１４　

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance,continued operation may causeserious damage.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

The indicator may also come on withthe ‘‘D’’ indicator.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks 5 times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a stateemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to

for moreinformation (see page ).

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It can take severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

88

435

On Touring models

Malfunction Indicator Lamp, Readiness Codes

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness CodesState

Emissions Testing

410

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１６：５１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４１５　

The brake systemindicator normallycomes on when you

turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and as a reminder tocheck the parking brake. It will stayon if you do not fully release theparking brake.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAindicator come on with the brakesystem indicator, have the vehicleinspected by your dealerimmediately.

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUIDLOW’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

369

8888

418

On Touring modelsOn Touring models

Brake System Indicator

EmergencyTowing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

411

U.S. Canada

０６／０７／２６　１８：１６：５９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４１６　

The vehicle’s fuses are contained infour fuse boxes (three, if the vehicledoes not have a rear entertainmentsystem).

To open the passenger’s fuse box,pull the right edge of the cover.

The interior fuse boxes are locatedunder the dashboard on the driver’sand passenger’s side.

The primary under-hood fuse box ison the passenger’s side. To open it,push the tabs as shown.

The secondary under-hood fuse boxis behind the primary fuse box.

Fuses

412

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

DRIVER’S SIDE INTERIOR FUSE BOX PASSENGER’S SIDE INTERIORFUSE BOX

０６／０７／２６　１８：１７：０７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４１７　

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the primaryunder-hood fuse box.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the top at thewire inside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

through , or the diagram onthe fuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. The diagram forthe interior driver’s side fuse box ison the kick panel below the fuse box.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

1.

2.

3. 4.

415 416

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

413

FUSE

BLOWNFUSE PULLER

０６／０７／２６　１８：１７：１６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４１８　

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace the fusewith one of the spare fuses of thesame rating or lower.

If the driver’s power window fuse isremoved, the AUTO function of thedriver’s window will be disabled. Youshould reset the AUTO feature, (seepage ).

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

5.

6.

188

256


Fuses

414

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the properrating f or the circuit, install one witha lower rating.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１７：２３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４１９　

－

－

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

No. Amps. Circuits Protected


No. Amps.


CONTINUED

Circuits Protected123456789

101112

10 A30 A10 A15 A10 A10 A7.5 A15 A30 A

30 A7.5 A

Left Headlight LowRear Defroster CoilLeft Headlight HighSmall LightsRight Headlight HighRight Headlight LowBack UpFI ECU (PCM)Condenser FanNot usedCooling FanMG Clutch

123456

40 A40 A40 A20 A20 A

Not UsedLeft Power Sliding DoorRight Power Sliding DoorPower TailgatePremiumAC Inverter

13141516171819202122

23

20 A30 A40 A15 A30 A30 A30 A40 A40 A70 A

120 A50 A50 A

40 A

789

1011

10 A10 A

7.5 A

Fog LightACMNot UsedNot UsedRear Entertainment System

Horn, StopRear DefrosterBack Up, ACCHazardVSA MotorVSAOption 1Option 2Heater MotorPassenger’s Fuse BoxBatteryIG1 MainPower Window Main

For some types:

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

415

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

０６／０７／２６　１８：１７：３４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４２０　

－

－

＊＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

No.No. Amps. Circuits Protected Amps. Circuits Protected

18192021222324252627282930313233

123456789

10111213

14151617

7.5 A15 A10 A15 A10 A7.5 A7.5 A

15 A7.5 A30 A15 A20 A

20 A20 A20 A20 A

TPMSIG CoilDaytime Running LightLAFRadioInterior LightsBack UpNot UsedFront Accessory SocketOPDSIG WiperRear Accessory SocketLeft Power Sliding DoorCloserDriver Power Seat SlidePedal Position AdjustmentDr Power Seat ReclinePower Tailgate Closer

15 A15 A10 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

10 A15 A10 A7.5 A

IG ACGIG Fuel PumpIG WasherIG MeterIG SRSIGPLeft Rear Power WindowRight Rear Power WindowPassenger’s Power WindowDriver’s Power WindowMoonroofNot UsedIG HACIG SOLACCHAC OP

::Canadian models

For some types

Fuse Locations

416

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Driver’s Side

Front

０６／０７／２６　１８：１７：４１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４２１　

－

－

＊

＊

＊


Amps.No. Circuits Protected

1 7.5 A STS

30 A

15 A20 A

15 A7.5 A20 A

15 A

12345678

9

Rear BlowerNot UsedDBWDoor LockNot UsedHeated SeatInstrument PanelRight Power Sliding DoorCloserFront Accessory Socket

: For some types

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

417

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passenger’s Side

INTERIOR FUSE BOX UPPER AREA

Driver’s Side

０６／０７／２６　１８：１７：４８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４２２　

－

－If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires and lift them off theground. The flat tire side (front orrear) should be lifted by the wheel-lift equipment. The other two tiresremain on the ground.

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Turn off the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Start the engine.Release the parking brake.

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

This is anacceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

Emergency Towing

418

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your vehicle must betransported with the f ront wheels of fthe ground.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１７：５７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４２３　

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

419

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

０６／０７／２６　１８：１８：０１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４２４　

420

０６／０７／２６　１８：１８：０３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４２５　

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 422................................Specifications . 424

DOT Tire Quality Grading.......................(U.S Vehicles) . 426

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 426.................................Treadwear . 426

......................................Traction . 426.............................Temperature . 427

.................................Tire Labeling . 428Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal............................Explanation . 430

.......................Emissions Controls . 432.....................The Clean Air Act . 432

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 432

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 432

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 432

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 433....................PGM-FI System . 433

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 433

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 433

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 433

....................Replacement Parts . 433..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 434

..............State Emissions Testing . 435....Testing of Readiness Codes . 435

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

421

０６／０７／２６　１８：１８：０７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４２６　

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

422

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

０６／０７／２６　１８：１８：１２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４２７　

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The transmission number is on alabel on the side of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

423

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

０６／０７／２６　１８：１８：１６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４２８　

－－

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

424

Dimensions

Weights

Capacities

Air Conditioning

Engine

201.0 in (5,106 mm)77.1 in (1,958 mm)

66.8 in (1,697 mm)66.7 in (1,694 mm)118.1 in (3,000 mm)

68.8 in (1,748 mm)70.0 in (1,778 mm)

8,410 lbs (3,815 kg)

LengthWidthHeight

WheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross combined weightrating (GCWR)

See the tire information label atta-ched to the driver’s doorjamb.

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine0.190 US gal (0.72 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

8.0 US qt (7.6 )3.3 US qt (3.1 )5.3 US qt (5.0 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

2.56 US gal (9.7 )1.85 US gal (7.0 )

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

24 26 oz (700 750 g)ND-OIL8

HFC-134a (R-134a)

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

PKJ16DR-M11IZFR5K-11

10.0 : 1212 cu-in (3,471 cm )

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)

4.8 US qt (4.5 )Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC

VTEC or i-VTEC , 6-cylinder (V6),gasoline engine

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanada Vehicles

Approx.21 US gal (80 )

NGK:DENSO:

1 : LX model2 : EX, EX-L and Touring models

: EX-L and Touring models

1

2

1

2

０６／０７／２６　１８：１８：３３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４２９　

－

＊＊＊

－－

－－－－－

－－－－－－－－－－－＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

425

Alignment

Tires

Fuses

Battery

Lights

60 W (HB3)12 V12 V 51 W (HB4)

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°0°30’

2°58’

Size

Pressure

235/65R16 103T235-710R460A 104TT135/80D17 103M

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

Interior

Under-hood

12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

35 W21 W1.5 CP

21 W21/5 W3 CP21 W5 W16 W5 W5 W2 W8 W3.8 W (2 CP)

Capacity 12 V12 V

60 AH/5 HR72 AH/20 HR

See page 416 and 417 or the fuselabel attached to the dashboard.See page 417 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the dashboard.See page 415 or the fuse boxcover.

Headlights

Fog lightsFront turn signal lightsFront parking/side markerlightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsTaillightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightIndividual map lights

Vanity mirror lightsCargo area lightDoor courtesy light

FrontRearFrontRearFront

U.S. Touring model

Front/Rear

SpareFront

RearSpare

(Amber)

(Amber)

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

1 :2 :3 :

FrontRear

HighLow

EX-L and Canadian Touring models

Except U.S. Touring models

(H8)(Amber)

1

2

3

1

1

０６／０７／２６　１８：１８：５９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４３０　

－The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

426

０６／０７／２６　１８：１９：０７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４３１　

－ Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature A, B, CTechnicalInform

ation

427

０６／０７／２６　１８：１９：１１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４３２　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following exampleTIN. TIN is located on the sidewallof the tire.

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

Max Load

The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

Max Press

Date of manufacture.

Tire type code.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

R

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

235

65

103

T

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication NumberMaximum Tire Load

Maximum Tire Pressure

428

235/65R16 103T

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

０６／０７／２６　１８：１９：２７　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４３３　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Symmetric

Nominal diameter at the rimseat in millimeters.

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial)

Outside diameter of the tire inmillimeters.

The PAX system tires have differentmarkings from conventional tiremarkings. Following is an example ofPAX system tire size with anexplanation of what each componentmeans.

Tire width in millimeters.

A

235

710

R

460

104

T

U.S. Touring model only

Tire Labeling (PAX System Tires)

PAX System Tire LabelingTechnicalInform

ation

429

235-710R460A 104T

０６／０７／２６　１８：１９：３６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４３４　

－

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

430

０６／０７／２６　１８：１９：４２　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４３５　

－

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

TechnicalInform

ation

431

０６／０７／２６　１８：１９：４８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４３６　

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positive

crankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

356

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Emissions Controls

432

０６／０７／２６　１８：１９：５６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４３７　

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls

TechnicalInform

ation

433

０６／０７／２６　１８：２０：０６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４３８　

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

The three way catalytic converterscontain precious metals that serve ascatalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converters are referredto as three-way catalysts, since theyact on HC, CO, and NOx.Replacement units must be originalHonda parts or their equivalent.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

434

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERSTHREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARM UP

０６／０７／２６　１８：２０：１３　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４３９　

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (about 3 minutes).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

CONTINUED

Testing of Readiness Codes

State Emissions Testing

TechnicalInform

ation

435

０６／０７／２６　１８：２０：２０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４４０　

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mphfor at least 20 minutes. Drive onthe highway in D (A/T). Do notuse the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

State Emissions Testing

436

０６／０７／２６　１８：２０：２５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４４１　

Customer Service................................Information . 438

....................Warranty Coverages . 439Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 440.....................Authorized Manuals . 441

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

437

０６／０７／２６　１８：２０：２８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４４２　

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele-phone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

421

Customer Service Information

438

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

０６／０７／２６　１８：２０：３６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４４３　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

this warranty gives upto 100 % credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2007 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2007 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

439

０６／０７／２６　１８：２０：４６　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４４４　

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

440

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

０６／０７／２６　１８：２０：５１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４４５　

－

＊

＊

＊

＊２００７

ＨＯＮ

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.

(credit card orders only)

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)A

uthorizedM

anuals

441

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

$75.00

$50.00

$44.00

$35.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

61SHJ02

61SHJ02EL

61SHJ40

31SHJ620

31SHJ800

31SHJM20

31SHJQ20

HON-R

Form Description

2005-07 Honda Odyssey

Service Manual

2005-07 Honda Odyssey

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2005 Model Series Honda Odyssey

Body Repair Manual

2007 Honda Odyssey

Owner’s Manual

2007 Honda Odyssey

Navigation System Manual

2007 Honda Odyssey

Honda Service History

2007 Honda Odyssey

Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Price EachPublication Form Number

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

www. helminc. com

０６／０７／２６　１８：２１：０１　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４４６　

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

442

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

０６／０７／２６　１８：２１：１０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４４７　

CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 312ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.....................................Position) . 147............Accessory Power Sockets . 206

...........................AC Power Outlet . 206....................Additives, Engine Oil . 361

...............Advanced Airbag System . 30...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 25

..............Air Conditioning System . 214.....................Rear A/C Control . 220

...............Air Outlets (Vents) . 217, 224

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 383......................................Antifreeze . 366

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 69, 328

...................................Operation . 328..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 256

Anti-theft Steering Column............................................Lock . 147

........................................Armrests . 174...............Audio Controls, Remote . 255

................................Audio System . 225...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 23.Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 141

.............Automatic Speed Control . 291..............Automatic Transmission . 322

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 424...............Checking Fluid Level . 367

.......................................Shifting . 322Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 322................Shift Lever Positions . 323

....................Shift Lock Release . 325

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 67, 409............................Jump Starting . 405

..............................Maintenance . 389............................Specifications . 425

..............................Before Driving . 305....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 21

.........................Beverage Holders . 195..................................Booster Seats . 57

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 328

.............Break-in, New Linings . 306....................Bulb Replacement . 375

...........................................Fluid . 369.......................................Parking . 192

.................System Indicator . 69, 411........................Wear Indicators . 327

.............................Braking System . 327.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 306

Brightness Control,...............................Instruments . 142

......................Brights, Headlights . 139Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 376..............................Brake Lights . 375

................Front Parking Lights . 373........Front Side Marker Lights . 373

...........Front Turn Signal Light . 372.................................Headlights . 371.........................Rear Bulbs . 375, 376

............Rear Turn Signal Light . 375............................Specifications . 425

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 371

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

０６／０７／２６　１８：２１：１５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４４８　

＊

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 3, 64

..............Daytime Running Lights . 141Daytime Running Lights

.......................................Indicator . 73.................................Dead Battery . 405

.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 440..............Defogger, Rear Window . 143..............Defrosting the Windows . 218

....................................Dimensions . 424.............Dimming the Headlights . 139

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 367

..................................Engine Oil . 309........................Directional Signals . 139

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 327

................................Cancel Button . 293............................Capacities Chart . 424

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 60..........................Cargo Area Light . 210

....................Cargo, How to Carry . 314..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

.........................................CD Care . 248...................................CD Changer . 239

.......CD Changer Error Message . 249.......................................CD Player . 241

...............................Center Pocket . 205...................................Center Tray . 195

........................Certification Label . 422.................................Chains, Tires . 387

Changing Oil........................................How to . 362......................................When to . 347

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 396...Charging System Indicator . 67, 409

............Checklist, Before Driving . 320................Childproof Door Locks . 160

.....................................Child Safety . 38..............................Booster Seats . 57

...................................Child Seats . 46

.....Important Safety Reminders . 41..........................................Infants . 43

..........................Larger Children . 47.........................................LATCH . 48

......................Risks with Airbags . 39.............................Small Children . 44

.........................................Tethers . 53........Where Should A Child Sit? . 39

.......................................Child Seats . 43......LATCH Anchorage System . 48

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 54Cleaning

...................................Seat Belts . 378...............Climate Control System . 219

..............................................Clock . 254.....................Code, Audio System . 256

........................CO in the Exhaust . 432............Cold Weather, Starting in . 321

......................Compact Spare Tire . 395.................Consumer Information . 438

.............Controls, Instruments and . 63....................Conversation Mirror . 198

Coolant........................................Adding . 364

....................................Checking . 310.........................Proper Solution . 364

...................Temperature Gauge . 77Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 432................Cruise Control Indicator . 75............Cruise Control Operation . 291

...................................Cup Holders . 195.............Customer Service Office . 438

Index

C

D

II

０６／０７／２６　１８：２１：１９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４４９　

＊

＊

CONTINUED

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 363Doors

Auto Door Locking/...............................unlocking . 155

............Locking and Unlocking . 154..................Lockout Prevention . 154

..............Manual Sliding Doors . 164........................Open monitor . 75, 91

....................Power Door Locks . 154.................Power Sliding Doors . 164

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 426...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 319....................................Economy . 311

Driving Position Memory........................................System . 185

....................DVD Error Message . 286...................................DVD Player . 257

..............................Economy, Fuel . 311..................................Emergencies . 391

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 405...........Brake System Indicator . 411

................Changing a Flat Tire . 396

.....Charging System Indicator . 409..................Checking the Fuses . 413

.........Driving with a Flat Tire . 392.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 143

............................Jump Starting . 405.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 409...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 410

..................Overheated Engine . 407.......................................Towing . 418

.........................Emergency Brake . 192....................Emergency Flashers . 143

......................Emergency Towing . 418.......................Emissions Controls . 432

.............Emissions Testing, State . 435Engine

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 77..............Engine Speed Limiter . 324

.........................If It Won’t Start . 403Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 67, 410........Oil Pressure Indicator . 67, 409..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 360

...............................Overheating . 407............................Specifications . 424

.......................................Starting . 321.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 432

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 60Exhaust Gas Recirculation

........................................System . 433Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 19

...................................Fan, Interior . 215Features, Comfort and

..............................Convenience . 213....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 307

........................................Filter, Oil . 362...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 143

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 395.............................Floor Mats . 177, 378

.......................Floor Storage Area . 201Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 367..........................................Brake . 369

..........................Power Steering . 370................Windshield Washers . 366

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 231

Index

E

F

IND

EX

III

０６／０７／２６　１８：２１：２４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４５０　

.................Folding the Third Seat . 182........................Four-way Flashers . 143

..............................Front Airbags . 9, 25......................................Front Seat . 171............................Adjusting . 171, 172

.......................................Heaters . 184

.....................................Airbags . 9, 25.................................................Fuel . 306

......................Fill Door and Cap . 307...........................................Gauge . 77

................Octane Requirement . 306....................................Refueling . 307

........................Reserve Indicator . 74.....................Fuses, Checking the . 413

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 311.........................................Gasoline . 306

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 74...........................................Gauge . 77

................Octane Requirement . 306....................................Refueling . 307

................Gas Station Procedures . 307Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 77

...............................................Fuel . 77...............................Speedometer . 77

.................................Tachometer . 77GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 338GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

.......................................Rating) . 338...................................Glove Boxes . 204

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight.......................................Rating) . 338

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 371............Hazard Warning Flashers . 143

.....................................Headlights . 139........................................Aiming . 371

............Automatic Lighting Off . 141.........Daytime Running Lights . 141

..................High Beam Indicator . 72.......................Reminder Chime . 139

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 371.................................Turning on . 139

...................................Headphones . 287............................Head Restraints . 174

...............................Heated Mirror . 192

...................................Heater, Seat . 184.....................Heating and Cooling . 214

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 321...............High-Low Beam Switch . 138

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 294

.......................Hood, Opening the . 308...........................................Horn . 4, 136

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 422Ignition

............................................Keys . 145.........................................Switch . 147

............Timing Control System . 433......................Immobilizer System . 146

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6...................................Indicators . 65, 66

......ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 69, 328Brake (Parking and Brake

...........................System) . 69, 411................Charging System . 67, 409

.............................Cruise Control . 75DRL (Daytime Running

.....................................Lights) . 73

Index

H

I

G

IV

０６／０７／２６　１８：２１：２９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４５１　

CONTINUED

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 398.......................................Jack, Tire . 397

................................Jump Starting . 405

................................................Keys . 145

.......................Label, Certification . 422...............Lane Change, Signaling . 139

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 15, 22...........LATCH Anchorage System . 48

.....................................Lazy Susan . 203....................Light Control Switch . 208

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 371

.......................................Indicator . 72.......................................Interior . 208.......................................Parking . 138

................................Turn Signal . 139............................Load Limits . 315, 337

....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 147Locks

.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 147............................Fuel Fill Door . 307

..................................Glove Box . 204..................Lockout Prevention . 154

...............................Power Door . 154.............................Sliding Doors . 164

......................................Tailgate . 160........................Low Coolant Level . 310.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 74

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 67, 409.........................Lower Anchors . 48, 50

..........................Lower Glove Box . 204...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 424

Indicators.....................................Fog Light . 72

.............................Fuel Economy . 75...................................High Beam . 72

.......Key (Immobilizer System) . 70.....................................Lights On . 72......................................Low Fuel . 74

................Low Oil Pressure . 67, 409..............Low Tire Pressure . 71, 332

..................Maintenance Minder . 76.....................Side Airbag Off . 35, 68

.........................................SRS . 34, 67.........................System Message . 76

...................................TPMS . 71, 333Turn Signal and Hazard

...................................Warning . 72Vehicle Stability Assist

..........................(VSA) System . 70............................VSA Activation . 70

..............................Washer Level . 73..................Individual Map Lights . 209

...............................Infant Restraint . 43......................................Infant Seats . 45

......LATCH Anchorage System . 48...........................Lower Anchors . 48

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 54

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 383

...................In-Floor Storage Area . 201.................................Inside Mirror . 191

.............................Inspection, Tire . 384......................Instrument Panel . 4, 136

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 142....................Integrated Sunshade . 197

...............................Interior Lights . 208........................................Introduction . i

Index

J

K

L

IND

EX

V

０６／０７／２６　１８：２１：３４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４５２　

＊

＊

...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 314

...................Neutral Gear Position . 323..................New Vehicle Break-in . 306

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 422

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 306...................................Odometer . 78, 85

.........................Odometer, Trip . 78, 86Oil

........................Change, How to . 362......................Change, When to . 347......................Checking Engine . 309..............Pressure Indicator . 67, 409

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 361

.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 147Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 432............................Outside Mirrors . 191

....................Overheating, Engine . 407.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 355

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 306

..................................Maintenance . 345................................Minder . 347-356

.........................Minder Indicator . 76...Owner Maintenance Checks . 355

.................................Record . 357-358..........................................Safety . 346

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 67, 410...................Manual Sliding Doors . 164

...............................Meters, Gauges . 77................Michilen PAX System . 392

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 191.................................Modifications . 313

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 312.......................................Moonroof . 190

Moving the Second Row Bucket.............................................Seat . 176

.............Multi-Information Display . 81

............Panel Brightness Control . 142

........................Park Gear Position . 323...........................................Parking . 326

...............................Parking Brake . 192Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 69, 411...............................Parking Lights . 139

................Parking Sensor System . 299..Parking Over Things that Burn . 326....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 35

.................................PAX System . 392.............................PGM-FI System . 433

........................Power Door Locks . 154Power Sliding Doors

.......................................Indicator . 74...................................Operation . 164

.....................................Switches . 165...............Power Socket Locations . 194

..............................Power Tailgate . 161............................Power Windows . 187

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19

Index

M

NP

O

VI

０６／０７／２６　１８：２１：４０　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４５３　

＊

CONTINUED

........................Protecting Children . 38.......................Protecting Infants . 43

.......Protecting Larger Children . 56.........Protecting Small Children . 44

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 53

.............................Using LATCH . 48

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 21

.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 440.................................Safety Features . 7

...........................................Airbags . 9.......................................Seat Belts . 8

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 61...............................Safety Messages . ii

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 21...............Additional Information . 21

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 23

.....................................Cleaning . 378......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22

................................Maintenance . 24Reminder Indicator and

................................Beeper . 21, 68................................Replacement . 24

...................System Components . 21...............Use During Pregnancy . 19

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15..................................Seat Heaters . 184

...................Radiator Overheating . 407.............Radio/CD Sound System . 225

...........................Readiness Codes . 410............Rear Audio Control Panel . 261

...............................Rear A/C Unit . 220........Rear Entertainment System . 257

Rear Lights, Bulb......................Replacement . 375, 376

...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 303..........................Rear View Mirror . 191

...............Rear Window Defogger . 143Rear Window Wiper and

.......................................Washer . 138.....Reclining the Seat Backs . 171, 173

.........Reclining the Second Seats . 171..............Reclining the Third Seat . 172

.................Reminder Indicators . 65, 66................Remote Audio Controls . 255................Remote Control (RES) . 284

.....................Remote Transmitter . 148Removable Second Row

......................................Console . 200........Removing the Second Seats . 178

Replacement Information................Engine Oil and Filter . 362

..........................................Fuses . 412................................Light Bulbs . 371................................Timing Belt . 370

...........................................Tires . 385.............................Wiper Blades . 379

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 24

Reserve Tank,.................Engine Coolant . 310, 364

..............Retractable Center Tray . 195..................Reverse Gear Position . 323

......................................Roof Rack . 317................................Rotation, Tire . 385

Index

S

R

IND

EX

VII

０６／０７／２６　１８：２１：４５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４５４　

＊ .....................................Tachometer . 77..........................................Tailgate . 160

.......................Opening the . 160, 161.......Open Monitor Indicator . 75, 91..Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 375, 376

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 391

...............................................Seats . 170......................Adjustments . 171, 172

..........Drivers Lumbar Support . 173.............Folding the Third Seat . 182

........................Head Restraints . 174.....Manual Height Adjustment . 172

....................Passenger Seating . 170..........Reclining the Third Seat . 172

....Removing the Second Seats . 178Removing the Stowable Second

...............Row Plus-One Seat . 179.....................Third Seat Access . 175

............................Security System . 290Sensors

Front Passenger’s Weight.....................................Sensors . 30

....Driver’s Seat Position Sensor . 30...............................Serial Number . 422

...........................Service Intervals . 347

...........................Service Manual . 441...........Service Station Procedure . 307

..........................Setting the Clock . 254...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 322

........................Shift Lock Release . 325................................Side Airbags . 9, 31

..........................Off Indicator . 35, 68

Side Marker Lights, Bulb..............................Replacement . 373.............................Signaling Turns . 139

.................................Sliding Doors . 164.....................................Snow Tires . 386

................................Sound System . 225Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 383............................Specifications . 425

....................Specifications Charts . 424................................Speed Control . 291...................................Speedometer . 77

..........SRS, Additional Information . 25...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

.............................Airbag Service . 36..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34

How Your Airbags............................Work . 27, 31, 33

........................SRS Components . 25.............................SRS Indicator . 34, 67

..START (Ignition Key Position) . 147.......................Starting the Engine . 321

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 321

................With a Dead Battery . 405..............State Emissions Testing . 435

........Steam Coming from Engine . 407Steering Wheel

................................Adjustment . 144...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 147

.........................Buttons . 82, 255, 291...................Stereo Sound System . 225....................Storing Your Vehicle . 390

Stowable Second Row Plus-One.............................................Seat . 178

........................Sunglasses Holder . 198........................................Sun Visor . 199

Supplemental Restraint System......................................Servicing . 36

.........................SRS Indicator . 34, 67...................System Components . 25

..................................Synthetic Oil . 361

Index

T

VIII

０６／０７／２６　１８：２１：４９　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４５５　

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

................................Vanity Mirror . 199.........Vehicle Capacity Load . 315, 337

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 424....Vehicle Identification Number . 422

.............................Vehicle Storage . 390.....................................Ventilation . 215

.................................................VIN . 422..................................Viscosity, Oil . 361

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 391

..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 426........................Unleaded Gasoline . 306

...........................Upper Glove Box . 204.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 363

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 61

Technical Descriptions.....Emissions Control Systems . 432

Three Way Catalytic.......................Converter . 433, 434

.......................Temperature Gauge . 77........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 224

...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 23..............Tether Anchorage Points . 54

............................Theft Protection . 256..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 434

Tilt and Telescoping the.........................Steering Wheel . 144..........................Time, Setting the . 254

....................................Timing Belt . 370

....................................Tire Chains . 387.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 396

...............................................Tires . 382..............................Air Pressure . 382

...................................Balancing . 385.........................Checking Wear . 384..........................Compact Spare . 395

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 426......................................Inflation . 382

..................................Inspection . 384.....................................Labeling . 428...................................Replacing . 385

......................................Rotating . 385...........................................Snow . 386

............................Specifications . 425................................Tire Chains . 387

Tire Pressure Monitoring....................System (TPMS) . 332...................Tools, Tire Changing . 396

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 337

................Emergency Wrecker . 418....Equipment and Accessories . 339

.............................Weight Limit . 337

.............................Trailer Loading . 337......................Trailer Towing Tips . 343

Transmission...............Checking Fluid Level . 367

...........................Fluid Selection . 368..............Identification Number . 423.............Shifting the Automatic . 340

...................................Treadwear . 426.................................Trip Meter . 78, 86

..................................Turn Signals . 139

Index

U

V

W

IND

EX

IX

０６／０７／２６　１８：２１：５４　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４５６　

＊....................Warranty Coverages . 439Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 366............................Level Indicator . 73

...................................Operation . 137Wheels

.............Adjusting the Steering . 144............Alignment and Balance . 385

..........................Compact Spare . 395......................................Wrench . 399

Windows.............................Auto Reverse . 187

................Operating the Power . 187.........................Rear, Defogger . 143

Windshield.....................................Cleaning . 137...................................Defroster . 218

.....................................Washers . 137Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 379...................................Operation . 137

Rear Windshield Wiper and...................................Washer . 138

..................Wireless Headphones . 287....................................Worn Tires . 384

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 418

: U.S. only

Index

X

０６／０７／２６　１８：２１：５８　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４５７　

０６／０７／２６　１８：２２：００　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４５８　

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )Rear:

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )Front:

Front:35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

Rear:35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

Compact Spare Tire:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

LX, EX, and U.S. Touring models:

21 US gal (80 )

EX-L and Canadian Touringmodels:

361

370

369

368

０６／０７／２６　１８：２２：１５　３１ＳＨＪ６２０　０４５９　

Documents

(Unlinked) 2007 Odyssey - American Honda Motor …...2007 Odyssey Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) This document does not contain hype rlinks and may be formatted for prin ting instead